HOYA CORPORATIONPENTAX Imaging Systems Division
2-36-9, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN(http://www.pentax.jp)
Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg, GERMANY
PENTAX Europe GmbH(European Headquarters) (HQ - http://www.pentaxeurope.com)(Germany - http://www.pentax.de)
PENTAX U.K. Limited

PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough, Berks
SL3 8PN, U.K.
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)

PENTAX France S.A.S.

112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,
FRANCE(http://www.pentax.fr)

PENTAX (Schweiz) AG

Widenholzstrasse 1, 8304 Wallisellen, Postfach 367,
8305 Dietlikon, SWITZERLAND(http://www.pentax.ch)

PENTAX Canada Inc.

1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,
CANADA (http://www.pentax.ca)

PENTAX Trading(SHANGHAI) Limited

23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032 CHINA(http://www.pentax.com.cn)

Operating Manual

Operating Manual

PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
(Headquarters)
600 12th Street, Suite 300 Golden, Colorado 80401, U.S.A.
(PENTAX Service Department)
12061 Tejon St. STE 600 Westminster, Colorado 80234,
U.S.A. (http://www.pentaximaging.com)

SLR Digital Camera

http://www.pentax.jp/english• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.
53495

Copyright © HOYA CORPORATION 2009
H03-200907 Printed in Philippines

For optimum camera performance, please read the
Operating Manual before using the camera.

Thank you for purchasing this PENTAX Q Digital Camera. Please read this manual
before using the camera in order to get the most out of all the features and functions.
Keep this manual safe, as it can be a valuable tool in helping you to understand all thecamera capabilities.
Lenses you can use
In general, lenses that can be used with this camera are DA, DA L, D FA and FA J
lenses and lenses that have an Aperture s (Auto) position. To use any other lens oraccessory, see p.53 and p.292.
Regarding copyrights
Images taken using the Q that are for anything other than personal enjoyment
cannot be used without permission according to the rights as specified in the CopyrightAct. Please take care, as there are cases where limitations are placed on taking
pictures even for personal enjoyment during demonstrations, performances or of items
on display. Images taken with the purpose of obtaining copyrights also cannot be usedoutside the scope of use of the copyright as laid out in the Copyright Act, and careshould be taken here also.
Regarding trademarks
PENTAX, Q and smc PENTAX are trademarks of HOYA CORPORATION.
PENTAX Digital Camera Utility and SDM are trademarks of HOYA CORPORATION.
SDHC logo is a trademark.
This product includes DNG technology under license by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The DNG logo is either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks orregistered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
All other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of theirrespective companies.
To users of this camera• There is a possibility that recorded data may be erased, noise may appear onrecorded images, or the camera may not function correctly when used near broadcast
towers or other facilities generating strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic
fields or near sources of strong static electricity.
• The liquid crystal panel used in the monitor is manufactured using extremely highprecision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or better, you
should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate or may illuminate
when they should not. However, this has no effect on the recorded image.
This product supports PRINT Image Matching III. PRINT Image Matching enabled
digital still cameras, printers and software help photographers to produce image morefaithful to their intentions. Some functions are not available on printers that are not
PRINT Image Matching III compliant.
Copyright 2001 Seiko Epson Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
PRINT Image Matching is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
The PRINT Image Matching logo is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen of the monitor in thismanual are different from the actual product.

1

FOR USING YOUR CAMERA SAFELY
We have paid close attention to the safety of this product. When using this product,
we request your special attention regarding items marked with the following
symbols.

Warning
CautionThis symbol indicates that violating this item could cause
serious personal injuries.
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause minor
or medium personal injuries, or material losses.

ABOUT THE CAMERA
Warning• Do not disassemble or modify the camera. High voltage areas are present inside thecamera, with the risk of electric shock.
• If the camera interior is exposed due to dropping or otherwise damaging the camera,
never touch the exposed portion. There is a risk of electric shock.
• Wrapping the strap around your neck is dangerous. Take care that small children do
not hang the strap over their necks.
• Do not look directly at the sun through the camera with a telephoto lens attached, asviewing the sun may damage your eyes. Viewing the sun directly with a telephoto lens
may lead to a loss of eyesight.
• If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop use
immediately, remove the battery or the AC adapter, and contact your nearest PENTAX
Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not place your finger over the flash when discharging the flash. You may burn yourself.
• Do not cover the flash with clothing when discharging the flash. Discoloration may occur.
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use. There is a risk of low temperatureburns when holding such portions for long periods.
• Should the monitor be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be careful not
to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin or in your eyes or mouth.
• Depending on a user's physical condition, some users may experience itching, breakout in a rash or suffer from eczema. If an abnormality occurs, immediately discontinue
using the camera and seek medical attention.

About the Battery Charger and AC Adapter
Warning• Always use the battery charger and AC adapter exclusively developed for thisproduct, with the specified power and voltage. Using a battery charger or AC adapter
not exclusive to this product, or using the exclusive battery charger or AC adapter withan unspecified power or voltage can cause a fire, electric shock, or camera
breakdown. The specified voltage is 100 - 240V AC.
• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electrical shock.

2• If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other abnormality
occurs, immediately discontinue using and consult a PENTAX Service Center.
Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX Service Center.
Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If thunderstorm should be present during use of the battery charger, unplug the power
cord and discontinue use. Continuing to use the product can cause damage to theequipment, fire or electrical shock.
• Wipe off the plug of the power cord if it should become covered with dust. This cancause a fire.
• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only CSA/UL Certified power supply cord set, cord
is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end with a molded-on
male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA configuration), and the other isprovided with a molded-on female connector body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial
type configuration) or the equivalent.

Caution• Do not place or drop heavy objects on or forcefully bend the AC plug cord. Doing so
may damage the cord. Should the AC plug cord be damaged, consult a PENTAX
Service Center.
• Do not touch or short-circuit the terminal area of the AC plug cord while the cord isplugged in.
• Do not plug or unplug the power cord with wet hands. This can cause an electric
shock.
• Do not drop the product, or subject it to violent impact. This can cause equipment
breakdown.
• Do not use the battery charger to charge batteries other than the rechargeable
lithium-ion battery D-LI90. Attempting to charge other types of batteries may cause
an explosion or heating, or may damage the battery charger.

About the Battery
Warning• Be sure to store the battery out of the reach of small children. Placing in mouth may
cause an electrical shock.
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub
them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.

Caution• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries may cause an
explosion or fire.
• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery may cause an explosion
or leakage.
• The battery should be inserted correctly, observing (+) and (-) marks on the battery
and the camera. Not inserting battery correctly may cause an explosion or a fire.
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or begins tosmoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.
• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and - contacts of thebattery.

• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. This can cause an explosion
or fire.
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothes, wash theaffected areas thoroughly with water.
• Precautions for D-LI90 Battery Usage:- USE SPECIFIED CHARGER ONLY.
- DO NOT INCINERATE.
- DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.
- DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT.
- DO NOT EXPOSE TO HIGH TEMP. (140°F / 60°C).

About the SD Memory Card
Warning• Be sure to store the SD Memory Card out of the reach of small children.
The SD Memory Card may be swallowed by mistake. Seek medical attention
immediately if a memory card is accidentally swallowed.

Care to be Taken During Handling
Before Using Your Camera• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network that is included in the package.
This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still working
properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a wedding or whentraveling). Pictures and sound cannot be guaranteed if recording, playback ortransferring your data to a computer, etc. is not possible due to a malfunction of yourcamera or recording media (SD Memory Card), etc.

About the Battery and Charger• Storing the battery fully charged may decrease the battery performance. Avoid storingin high temperatures.
• If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the battery will
over-discharge and shorten the battery’s usage span.
• Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.
• The AC plug cord provided with this camera is developed exclusively for the battery
charger D-BC90. Do not use it with other devices.

Precautions on Carrying and Using Your Camera• Do not subject the camera to high temperatures or high humidity. Do not leave thecamera in a vehicle, as the temperature can get very high.

3

4• Do not subject the camera to strong vibrations, shocks, or pressure. Use a cushion toprotect the camera from vibrations of motorcycles, automobiles, or ships.
• The temperature range for camera use is -10°C to 40°C (14°F to 104°F).
• The monitor may appear black under high temperatures, but will return to normal as
temperatures normalize.
• The monitor may respond more slowly at low temperatures. This is due to liquid
crystal properties, and is not a fault.
• Sudden temperature changes will cause condensation on the inside and outside of
the camera. Place the camera in your bag or a plastic bag, removing the camera after
temperature of the camera and surroundings are equalized.
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salts. These could
cause a camera breakdown. Wipe dry any rain or water drops on the camera.
• Please do not press forcefully on the monitor. This could cause breakage or
malfunction.
• Be careful not to over tighten the tripod screw when using a tripod.

Cleaning Your Camera• Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as thinner or alcohol benzene.
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens or viewfinder. Never use aspray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.
• Please contact PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning of the CMOS
sensor. (This will involve a fee.)

Storing Your Camera• Do not store the camera with preservatives or chemicals. Storage in hightemperatures and high humidity can cause mold to grow on the camera. Remove fromthe case and store in a dry and well-ventilated location.

Other Precautions• Periodic inspections are recommended every one to two years to maintain highperformance.
• Refer to “Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card” (p.50) regarding the SD
Memory Card.
• Please note that deleting the data recorded on an SD Memory Card or formatting an
SD Memory Card using a camera or computer will not necessarily delete the data sothat they cannot be recovered using off the shelf data recovery software. Such data
should be handled and managed at your own risk.

Regarding Product Registration
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration,
which can be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX
website. Thank you for your cooperation.
Refer to the provided “Quick Guide” for more information.

5Contents
FOR USING YOUR CAMERA SAFELY ...............................................1
Care to be Taken During Handling .......................................................3
Contents ...............................................................................................5
Composition of the Operating Manual ................................................11

Before Using Your Camera

13

Q Characteristics ................................................................. 14
Checking the Contents of the Package...................................... 16
Names and Functions of Working Parts .................................... 17
Capture Mode .....................................................................................18
Playback Mode ...................................................................................20

Display Indicators ........................................................................ 22
Monitor................................................................................................22
Viewfinder ...........................................................................................31
LCD Panel ..........................................................................................33

How to Change Function Settings.............................................. 34
Using the Direct Keys .........................................................................34
Using the Control Panel......................................................................35
Using the Menus.................................................................................36

Using the Mode Dial..................................................................... 39

Getting Started

41

Attaching the Strap ...................................................................... 42
Using the Battery ......................................................................... 43
Charging the Battery...........................................................................43
Inserting/Removing the Battery ..........................................................44
Battery Level Indicator ........................................................................46
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback Time
(Battery Fully Charged).......................................................................46
Using the AC Adapter (Optional) ........................................................47

Inserting/Removing the SD Memory Card ................................. 49
Recorded Pixels and Quality Level.....................................................51

Attaching the Lens....................................................................... 53
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter ............................................... 55
Turning the Camera On and Off.................................................. 56
Initial Settings .............................................................................. 57
Setting the Display Language.............................................................57
Setting the Date and Time ..................................................................61

6

Basic Operations

63

Basic Shooting Operation ........................................................... 64
Holding the Camera............................................................................64
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings ..............................66

Using a Zoom Lens ...................................................................... 71
Using the Built-in Flash ............................................................... 72
Setting the Flash Mode.......................................................................72
Compensating Flash Output ...............................................................76
Allowing Shooting while Charging Flash.............................................77

Playing Back Images ................................................................... 78
Playing Back Images ..........................................................................78
Deleting Images..................................................................................79

Shooting Functions

81

How to Operate the Shooting Functions ................................... 82
Direct Keys Setting Items ...................................................................82
Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items ..........................................................83
Custom Setting Menu Setting Items ...................................................85

Setting the Exposure ................................................................... 88
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed.................................................88
Setting the Sensitivity .........................................................................90
Changing the Exposure Mode ............................................................93
Selecting the Metering Method .........................................................113
Adjusting the Exposure.....................................................................115

Focusing ..................................................................................... 118
Using the Autofocus..........................................................................118
AF Adjustment ..................................................................................121
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)............................................122
Fixing the Focus (Focus Lock)..........................................................124
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus).................................126

Checking the Composition, Exposure and Focus Before
Shooting (Preview) .................................................................... 129
Selecting the Preview Method ..........................................................129
Displaying the Optical Preview .........................................................130
Displaying the Digital Preview ..........................................................131

Preventing Camera Shake during Shutter Release ................ 132
Using the Shake Reduction Function ...............................................132
Shooting with the Self-timer..............................................................136
Shooting with the Remote Control (Optional) ...................................138
Shooting with the Mirror Lock-up Function .......................................141

Taking Pictures Continuously .................................................. 143
Continuous Shooting ........................................................................143
Interval Shooting...............................................................................144
Multi-exposure ..................................................................................146

Shooting while Adjusting the Settings (Auto Bracket)........... 148
Shooting while the Exposure is Automatically Changed (Exposure
Bracketing)........................................................................................148
Shooting while Adjusting Other Settings (Extended Bracketing) ......151

Taking Pictures Using Digital Filter.......................................... 153
Shooting with the Live View...................................................... 156
Taking Still Pictures ..........................................................................157
Recording Movies .............................................................................160

Using the Flash167

Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode ....................... 168
Using the Slow-Speed Sync .............................................................168
Using the Trailing Curtain Sync ........................................................170

Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in Flash ........... 171
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash............................... 172
Using an External Flash (Optional) .......................................... 173
Using P-TTL Auto Mode ...................................................................174
Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode................................................175
Using in Wireless Mode ....................................................................176
Red-Eye Reduction...........................................................................179
Trailing Curtain Sync ........................................................................180
Connecting an External Flash with an Extension Cord.....................180
Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension Cords...............................181
Contrast-Control-Sync Flash ............................................................182
X-sync Socket...................................................................................183

Shooting Settings

185

Setting the File Format .............................................................. 186
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels ...................................................186
Setting the JPEG Quality Level ........................................................187
Setting the File Format .....................................................................188

Setting the White Balance ......................................................... 191
Fine-tuning the White Balance..........................................................193
Adjusting the White Balance Manually .............................................194
Adjusting the White Balance with Color Temperature ......................196
Saving the White Balance Setting of a Captured Image...................198

Correcting Images ..................................................................... 199
Adjusting the Brightness ...................................................................199
Lens Correction ................................................................................201
Adjusting the Composition ................................................................203

Setting the Image Finishing Tone (Custom Image) ................ 205

7

8

Storing Frequently Used Settings ............................................ 207
Saving the Settings...........................................................................207
Checking the Saved USER Settings.................................................208
Using Saved USER Settings ............................................................209
Changing the Settings ......................................................................209
Resetting to Default Settings ............................................................210

Playback Functions

211

Playback Functions Operation ................................................. 212
Playback Mode Palette Setting Items ...............................................212
Playback Menu Setting Items ...........................................................213

Enlarging Images ....................................................................... 214
Displaying Multiple Images ....................................................... 216
Multi-image Display Screen ..............................................................216
Displaying Images by Folder ............................................................217
Displaying Images by Shooting Date (Calendar display)..................218
Joining Multiple Images (Index) ........................................................219

Slideshow ................................................................................... 222
Setting the Slideshow Display ..........................................................222
Starting the Slideshow ......................................................................223

Rotating Images ......................................................................... 225
Comparing Images..................................................................... 226
Deleting Multiple Images ........................................................... 227
Deleting Selected Images.................................................................227
Deleting a Folder ..............................................................................228
Deleting All Images...........................................................................230

Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect) .............................. 231
Protecting a Single Image.................................................................231
Protecting All Images........................................................................232

Connecting the Camera to AV Equipment............................... 233
Connecting the Camera to a Video IN Jack......................................233
Connecting the Camera to an HDMI Terminal..................................235

Processing Images

237

Changing the Image Size .......................................................... 238
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and Quality Level(Resize) ............................................................................................238
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping) .........................................239

Processing Images with Digital Filters .................................... 241
Applying the Digital Filter ..................................................................243
Recreating Filter Effects ...................................................................244
Searching for the Original Image ......................................................246

Developing RAW Images........................................................... 247
Developing One RAW Image............................................................247
Developing Multiple RAW Images ....................................................248
Specifying the Parameters................................................................250

Readjusting Images Shot in JPEG Format .............................. 252

Changing Additional Settings

253

How to Operate the Set-up Menu.............................................. 254
Set-up Menu Setting Items ...............................................................254

Formatting the SD Memory Card .............................................. 256
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and Display Language ...... 257
Setting the Beep ...............................................................................257
Changing the Date Display ...............................................................258
Setting the World Time .....................................................................258
Setting the Display Language...........................................................261

Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display .......................... 262
Setting the Text Size.........................................................................262
Setting the Guide Display Time ........................................................262
Setting the Status Screen Display ....................................................262
Setting the Display for Instant Review ..............................................263
Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor ............................................264
Adjusting the Color of the Monitor ....................................................265
Setting the Electronic Level Display .................................................266

Setting the Folder Name/File Number Naming Convention ... 267
Selecting the Folder Name ...............................................................267
Selecting the File Number Setting ....................................................267
Setting the File Name .......................................................................268

Setting the Power Setting.......................................................... 270
Setting Auto Power Off .....................................................................270
Selecting a Battery............................................................................270

Setting the DPOF Settings ........................................................ 273
Setting USB Connection Mode ................................................. 275
Setting the Photographer Information Saved to Exif.............. 277
Setting the Color Space ............................................................ 279
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS Sensor(Pixel Mapping) .......................................................................... 280
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera (Memory) .............. 281

910

Appendix283

Default Settings.......................................................................... 284
Resetting the Menu...........................................................................290

Functions Available with Various Lens Combinations .......... 292
Notes on [37. Using Aperture Ring] ..................................................294

Cleaning the CMOS Sensor....................................................... 295
Removing Dust with Ultrasonic Vibrations (Dust Removal)..............295
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor (Dust Alert)............................296
Removing Dust with a Blower...........................................................297

Optional Accessories ................................................................ 299
Error Messages .......................................................................... 305
Troubleshooting......................................................................... 307
Main Specifications ................................................................... 309
Glossary...................................................................................... 314
Index............................................................................................ 319
WARRANTY POLICY.................................................................. 326

11Composition of the Operating ManualThis Operating Manual contains the following chapters.
1 Before Using Your Camera
Explains camera characteristics, accessories and the names and functions ofvarious parts.

2 Getting Started
Explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be sure toread it and follow the instructions.

3 Basic Operations
Explains the procedures for taking and playing back pictures.

4 Shooting Functions

1
2
3
4

Explains the shooting-related functions.

5 Using the Flash5

Explains how to use the built-in flash and the external flash.

6 Shooting Settings

6

Explains the procedures for configuring image processing and setting the file format.

7 Playback Functions

7

Explains the procedures for playing back, deleting, and protecting pictures.

8 Processing Images
Explains the procedures for changing the image size, using image filters andprocessing pictures taken in RAW format.

9 Changing Additional Settings
Explains the procedures for changing the camera settings, such as the monitor
settings and the image file naming convention.

10 Appendix
Explains troubleshooting, introduces optional accessories and provides various
resources.

8
9
10

12
The symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.

1

Shows reference page number explaining a related operation.
Shows useful information.
Shows precautions to take when operating the camera.

1 Before Using Your
CameraCheck the package contents and names and functions ofworking parts before use.

Q Characteristics ..........................................14
Checking the Contents of the Package ..............16
Names and Functions of Working Parts ............17
Display Indicators ................................................22
How to Change Function Settings ......................34
Using the Mode Dial .............................................3914

1

Q Characteristics

Before Using Your Camera• Features a 23.4×15.6 mm CMOS sensor with approximately 14.6 million
effective pixels for high precision and a wide dynamic range.
• Features Shake Reduction (SR), an image sensor shifting shake
reduction system. This enables you to capture sharp pictures withminimal camera shake regardless of the lens type.
• Features an AF sensor with 11 focusing points. The central 9 focusing
points are wide cross area sensors.
• Features a viewfinder similar to that of a conventional 35 mm camera,
with a magnification of approximately 0.9 and field of view ofapproximately 100%, for easier manual focusing. Also features asuperimpose function in which the AF points on the viewfinder illuminate
red.
• Features a large 3.0-inch monitor with approximately 921,000 dots, awide viewing angle and brightness and color adjusting functions forhigh-precision viewing performance.
• Features a Live View function for shooting while viewing the subject inreal-time on the monitor.
• Movies can be recorded by taking advantage of the camera lensproperties. The camera can also output composite and HDMI video sothat you can watch recorded images and movies on a TV or high-quality
monitor.
• A user-friendly design has been implemented in various parts of thecamera. The large text, high-contrast monitor and easy-to-use menus
make the camera easier to operate.
• The body exterior is magnesium alloy, and the dials, buttons, joints, andretractable parts of the camera are dust-proof and water-resistant.
• Features Dust Removal function to shake the CMOS sensor andremove the collected dust.
• Features Hyper-program and Hyper-manual modes that let you takepictures with the intended exposure. Also features Sensitivity Priority
mode K that automatically adjusts aperture and shutter speed
according to the set sensitivity, and Shutter & Aperture Priority mode
L that automatically adjusts sensitivity according to the set apertureand shutter speed.
• Features Digital Filter to internally process the image in the camera. You
can use digital filters such as Star Burst or Soft while taking pictures or
to process images after taking pictures.
• Features Custom Image which allows you to adjust settings while
previewing the edited image, enabling a wider range of expression.

The captured area (view angle) will differ between the Q and 35 mm SLR
cameras even if the same lens is used because the format size for 35 mm film
and CMOS sensor are different.
Sizes for 35 mm film and CMOS sensor
35 mm film
: 36×24 mm
Q CMOS sensor : 23.4×15.6 mm
Angles of view being equal, the focal length of a lens used with a 35 mm camera
must be approximately 1.5 times longer than that of Q. To obtain an angleof view framing the same area, divide the focal length of the 35 mm lens by 1.5.
Example) To capture the same image as a 150 mm lens attached to a 35 mm
camera150÷1.5=100
Use a 100 mm lens with the Q.
Inversely, multiply the focal length of the lens used with the Q by 1.5 todetermine the focal length for 35 mm cameras.
Example) If 300 mm lens is used with the Q
300×1.5=450
Focal length is equivalent to a 450 mm lens on a 35 mm camera.

Shake Reduction (SR)Shake Reduction (SR) on the Q features a PENTAX original system
which uses magnetic force to move the image sensor at high speeds,
compensating camera shake.
The camera may generate some operating noise when it is shaken, suchas when changing the composition of a picture. It is not a malfunction.

15

1
Before Using Your Camera• Records in the versatile JPEG format or the high quality and fully
editable RAW format. You can also select JPEG+RAW and record inboth formats. Pictures taken in RAW format can be easily processedinternally by the camera.
• Features Custom Image and White Balance which allow you to readjust
images shot in JPEG format without affecting the image quality.
• Supports the optional Battery Grip D-BG4 with vertical shutter releasebutton. If a battery (D-LI90) is inserted in both the camera and grip, thebattery with more power is prioritized. This enables you to get the best
camera performance for an extended period. A menu item also allows
you to prioritize a battery and use its full power before switching to theother battery.

16

Checking the Contents of the
Package
The following accessories are packaged with your camera.
Check that all accessories are included.

1
Before Using Your Camera

Hot shoe cover FK(Installed on camera)

Eyecup FR(Installed on camera)

ME viewfinder cap

Sync socket 2P cap(Installed on camera)

Body mount cover(Installed on camera)

Triangular ring andprotective cover(Installed on camera)

USB cable
I-USB7

AV cable
I-AVC7

Strap
O-ST53

Rechargeable lithium-ion
battery D-LI90

Battery charger
D-BC90AC plug cord

Software (CD-ROM)
S-SW90Operating Manual(this manual)

Quick GuideNames and Functions of Working
Parts
Built-in flash
Strap lug

Hot shoe
Strap lug
X-sync socket

Self-timer lamp/
Remote control
receiverLens mount index

MirrorLens unlock button

Lens information
contacts

Speaker
Microphone
Viewfinder

AF coupler

Diopter adjustment
lever
LCD panel
Film plane indicator(CMOS sensor
plane indicator)

Microphone terminal
mini HDMI terminal
PC/AV terminal
DC input terminal
Terminal cover
Monitor

Tripod socket
Battery grip contacts

Self-timer lamp/
Remote control
receiver
Cable releaseterminal
Card access lamp

Battery coverunlock knob
Battery cover* In the first illustration, the camera is shown with the Hot shoe cover FK
removed.
* In the second illustration, the camera is shown with the Hot shoe cover FK and
the Eyecup FR removed.

1
Before Using Your Camera

AF assist light
Card cover

17

18

Capture Mode
Functions of buttons, dials and levers used during shooting are noted.
1
Before Using Your Camera

1
2
3

7
8
9

4

0

5

a

6

b

c

e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m

d
1 m button
Turn the rear e-dial whilepressing this button to set the
EV compensation value.
(p.115)2 o button
Turn the rear e-dial whilepressing this button to set the
ISO sensitivity. (p.90)

3 Shutter release button
Press to capture images.
(p.67)

4 Main switch
Move to turn the power on/off(p.56) or to preview (p.129).

5 Front e-dial (R)Changes the settings.

6 Lens unlock button
Press to detach lens. (p.53)

7 E button
Press to pop up the built-in
flash. (p.74)

19
8 Mode dial lock button
Press to allow the mode dial tobe turned. (p.39)

9 Mode dial

0 Metering modeswitching lever
Changes the metering
method. (p.113)

a | button
Temporarily changes the fileformat. Saves JPEG and
RAW file by default. (p.189)

b Focus mode lever
Switches between autofocus
modes (l/k) (p.118)
and manual focus mode
(p.126).

c Q button
Switches to the Playback
mode. (p.78)

d M button
Turns the status screen
display on the monitor on/off.
(p.23)
Displays the control panel
when the status screen isshown. (p.24)

Changes the settings.

f L button
Records the exposure before
shooting (p.116) and saves apreview image.

g | (Green) button
Sets the exposure mode to
Automatic Exposure andresets the settings.

h AF point switching dial
Sets focusing area. (p.122)

i = button
Sets focusing area andtemporarily provides manual
focus. (p.120)

j U button
Displays the Live View.
(p.156)

k 4 button
When the control panel or amenu screen is displayed,press this button to confirm
the selected item. When the
AF point switching dial is set toj (Select), press the button
to change the AF point.
(p.123)

1
Before Using Your Camera

Switches the exposure
modes. (p.39)

e Rear e-dial (S)20
l Four-way controller(2345)

1
Before Using Your Camera

Opens the [Drive Mode],[Flash Mode], [White Balance]or [Custom Image] setting
screen (p.82). When thecontrol panel or a menu
screen is displayed, use this to
move the cursor or change
items. When the AF pointswitching dial is set to j
(Select), use this to move the
AF point. (p.123)

m 3 button
Displays the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu (p.83). Next, press thefour-way controller (5) todisplay other menus.

Playback Mode
Functions of buttons, dials and levers used during playback are noted.

1
2
3
4

8
5
6

9
0
a

7

b

21
1 m button
Press in the enlarged view toincrease the magnification.
(p.214)2 Shutter release button

3 Main switch
Move to turn the power on/off.
(p.56) Set to the | position toswitch to Capture mode andpreview.

4 Front e-dial (R)Displays the next or previous
image.

5 i button
Press to delete images. (p.79)

6 Q button
Press to switch to Capturemode.

7 M button
Press to display the shooting
information on the monitor.
(p.25)

Use this to change themagnification in the enlarged
view (p.214) and display
multiple images at the sametime (p.216).

9 | (Green) button
Press in the enlarged view todecrease the magnification.
(p.214)0 4 button
Saves the item you selected in
the menu.

a Four-way controller(2345)
Press 3 to display the
playback mode palette(p.212). When a menu screen
is displayed, use this to movethe cursor or change items.

b 3 button
Press to display the[Q Playback 1] menu
(p.213). Next, press the fourway controller (5) to display
other menus.

References to Button Names
In this Operating Manual, the buttons of the fourway controller are referred to in the following way.

1
Before Using Your Camera

Press halfway to switch to
Capture mode.

8 Rear e-dial (S)22

Display Indicators
Monitor1
Before Using Your Camera

The following indicators appear
on the monitor depending on
the status of the camera.

MonitorThe brightness or the color of the monitor can be adjusted. (p.264)

At Start-up or when Operating the Mode Dial
Guides appear on the monitor for 3 seconds (default setting) when thecamera is switched on or the mode dial is turned.
Select [Off] for [Guide Display] in the [R Set-up 1] menu to not show indicators.
(p.262)

1

2

P Program
Automatic Exposure

RAW RAWAF Cancel AF

05/05/2009

3
1
2

Exposure Mode (p.93)
Operation guide

P

Tv
Av

10:30AM

4
3
4

World Time (p.258)
Date and Time (p.61)* 3 appears only when [World Time] is set to [Destination].

23
Capture Mode
While shooting, the status screen is displayed showing the current
shooting function settings.
Status screen

P USER
ISO

1

AF.S

SHIFT

1/ 2000

F 2.8
+1.0
G1A1

1600

AUTO

-5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 +5

AWB
JPEG 14M

Exposure Mode (p.93)
AE Lock (p.116)
Interval Shooting (p.144)/Multiexposure (p.146)/Extended
Bracketing (p.151)/Digital Filter(p.153)/HDR Capture (p.200)

4Shake Reduction (p.132)/Horizon
Correction (p.133)

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Focus Mode (p.118)
Metering Method (p.113)
Battery level (p.46)
E-dial guide
Shutter speed
Aperture
ISO/ISO AUTO
Sensitivity (p.90)

3

9

8

8 11
13
8
15
16
19

[1234]

1
2
3

2

20

4

5

22
23

12
14
21

7

10

8

17

6

18

24
25

13 EV Compensation (p.115)/
Exposure Bracketing (p.148)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

EV barFlash Mode (p.72)
Drive Mode (p.82)
White Balance (p.191)
Custom Image (p.205)
File Format (p.188)
JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.186)
JPEG Quality (p.187)
Flash Exposure Compensation(p.76)

23 Adjust White Balance (p.193)
24 AF point (p.122)
25 Remaining image storage capacity

1
Before Using Your Camera(All of the indications are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The Actual
display may differ.)

24

Control panel
Press the M button in the status screen to display the control panel and change
settings.

1

ISO AUTO Setting

1

ISO

Before Using Your Camera

AUTO

2

200-1600
DR
200

WB

OFF

JPEG

14M

05/05/ ’09

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

HDR
OFF

10:30AM

Function nameSensitivity
Program Line
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
Distortion Correction
Extended Bracketing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture

[

37]

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

10 Lateral Chromatic Aberration
Correction
11
12
13
14
15
16

File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
Shake Reduction
Date and Time
Remaining image storage capacity• Items that cannot be changed due to the current camera setting status
cannot be selected.
• The status screen will disappear if no operations are made within 30 seconds
after pressing the M button.
• When [Status Screen] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu is set to [Off], the status
screen is not displayed. The control panel turns on and off each time the
M button is pressed.

25
Playback Mode
The camera switches display information when you press the M
button during playback.
Captured image and indicators are displayed.

Histogram display

Images and histogram (Brightness/RGB) aredisplayed.

Detailed information display

Detailed showing of how and when the images
were taken is displayed.

No info. display

Only captured images are displayed.

M

1/ 2000

F5.6

1/ 2000

100-0001

Standard

F5.6

100-0001

Histogram display

M

M
P

M

AF.S

800mm
1/ 2000

WB

DR
200

F5.6
+1.0
+1.0
ISO 200 10000K G2 A1JPEG 14M
AdobeRGB

±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0

05/05/ ’09 10:00AM 100-0001

No info. display

Detailed information display

The information that is shown first during playback is the same as that of thelast playback in the previous session. The [Standard] screen is displayed every
time the camera is turned on by setting [Playback Display] to P (Off) in[Memory] (p.281) in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.

1
Before Using Your Camera

Standard

26

Detailed information display
Use the four-way controller (23) to switch between pages.
Page 1
2

P
1

AF.S

Before Using Your Camera

800mm
1/ 2000

WB

DR
200

F5.6
+1.0
+1.0
ISO 200 10000K G2 A1JPEG 14M
AdobeRGB

9
15
19
22

Captured image
Protect setting
Exposure Mode
Focus Mode
AF point
Flash Mode
Metering Method
Lens focal length
Shutter speed
Shake Reduction/Horizon
Correction

11 Drive Mode
12 Extended Bracketing/
HDR Capture/Multi-exposure
13 Highlight Correction
14 Shadow Correction

78

10 11 12 13 14
16
17 18
20
21
23

24
28

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

26
5

4
6

05/05/ ’09 10:00AM 100-0001
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3

1

±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0

27

25
29

Aperture
EV Compensation
Flash Exposure Compensation
Digital Filter
Sensitivity
White Balance
Adjust White Balance
File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
Color Space
Image Tone
Custom Image parameters
Shooting date/time
Folder number-File number* Indicators 6 and 17 appear only for images in which the flash was discharged.
* Indicators 12, 13, 14, 18, and 21 appear only for images taken with thecorresponding functions enabled.
* Indicators 23 and 24 do not appear for RAW images.

27Page 2
Photographer
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

30Copyright Holder
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

30

31
31
32

30 Information tampering warning
31 Photographer (p.277)

32 Copyright Holder (p.277)

Movie

4
Movie 10min00sec

1
1
2

File Format
Playback time

100-0001

2

3
3

Folder number-File number/
Volume4

Four-way controller guide1
Before Using Your Camera

32

28

1

Histogram Display
The following histograms can be displayed when playing back still
pictures. The “Brightness histogram” shows the distribution of brightness
and the “RGB histogram” shows the distribution of color intensity. Use thefour-way controller (23) to switch between Brightness histogram and
RGB histogram.

Before Using Your Camera

1
23

8
9

11
23

7
6

1/ 2000

F5.6

5

4

1/ 2000

100-0001326Brightness histogram

1
2
3
4
5
6

10

1

Histogram (Brightness)
Folder number-File number
Protect setting
Aperture
Shutter speed
File Format

5

F5.6

100-0001

4 3

2

RGB histogram

7
8
9
10
11

Color SpaceHistogram (R)Histogram (G)Histogram (B)Switch Brightness histogram/
RGB histogram* Indicator 3 appears only for images with Protect setting.
Areas affected by bright or dark portions blink if [Bright/Dark Area] warning is
set to O (On) in [Playback Display Method] in the [Q Playback 1] menu.
(p.215)

29

1(Dark)

Dark portions←Brightness→ (Bright)

Bright portions

The shape and the distribution of thehistogram before and after shooting tells you whether the exposure level
and contrast are correct or not, and lets you decide if you need to use EV
compensation and take a picture again.
1 Adjusting the Exposure (p.115)
1 Adjusting the Brightness (p.199)
Understanding Brightness
When the brightness is correct and there are no overly light or dark areas,
the graph peaks in the middle. If the image is too dark, the peak is on theleft side, and if it is too bright, the peak is on the right side.

Dark image

Image with few brightor dark areas

Bright image

When the image is too dark, the part to the left is cut off (dark portions withno detail) and when the image is too bright, the part to the right is cut off(bright portions with no detail).
Bright portions blink red on the monitor and dark portions blink yellow
when [Bright/Dark area] is O (On).
1 Playing Back Images (p.78)
1 Setting the Display for Instant Review (p.263)

Before Using Your Camera

A histogram shows the brightness
distribution of an image. The
horizontal axis represents brightness(dark at the left and bright at the right)
and the vertical axis represents thenumber of pixels.

Number of pixels→

Using the Histogram30

1

Understanding Color BalanceDistribution of color intensity is displayed for each color in the RGB
histogram. The right side of the graphs look similar for images that havewhite balance adjusted well. If only one color is lopsided to the left, thatcolor is too intense.
1 Setting the White Balance (p.191)

Before Using Your Camera

Operation guide
The following indicators appear on the monitor to indicate the keys,
buttons and e-dials that can be operated at that time.
Example:2

Four-way controller (2)3 button3

Four-way controller (3)4 button

4

Four-way controller (4)5Four-way controller (5)|Green button
L button

R

Front e-diali button

S

Rear e-dial

Shutter release button

When holding the camera verticallyIf the camera is held vertically while measuring thebrightness, the control panel/status screen isdisplayed vertically. The directions of the four-way
controller (2345) also change to match theorientation of the camera.

ISO AUTO Setting
ISO

AUTO

200-1600
DR
200

HDR
OFF

WB

JPEG

14M

05/05/ ’09
10:30AM[1234]

31

Viewfinder
The following information appears in the viewfinder.

2

3

1

4 5

13
1
2
3
4

5
6

7

8

9

10

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

14 15 16 17 18 19

AF frame (p.55)
Spot metering frame (p.114)
AF point (p.122)
Flash status (p.72)
Appears when flash is available.
Blinks when flash is recommended but not set or is being charged.
Manual focus (p.126)
Appears when the focus mode is set to \.
Shutter speed
Shutter speed when capturing or adjusting (underlined when shutter speed
can be adjusted).
Aperture
Aperture when capturing or adjusting (underlined when aperture can be
adjusted).
Focus indicator (p.67)
Appears continuously when image is focused.
Blinks when the subject is not in focus.
EV bar (p.115, p.65)
Shows the EV compensation values or difference between the appropriate
and current exposure values when the exposure mode is set to a.
Displays the camera angle when [Electronic Level] is O (On).
ISO/ISO AUTO
Appears when the sensitivity is displayed.

Before Using Your Camera

1

1

32
11
12
13

1
Before Using Your Camera

14
15
16
17
18

19

Sensitivity
Shows the number of recordable images immediately after shooting.
AE Lock (p.116)
Appears during AE lock.
Move AF point (p.123)
Appears when the AF point is being moved with the AF point switching dial
set to j (Select).
Multi-exposure (p.146)
Appears when Multi-exposure is set.
Metering Method (p.113)
Shake Reduction (p.132)
Appears when the Shake Reduction function is activated.
Flash Exposure Compensation (p.76)
Appears when the flash exposure compensation is in use.
EV Compensation (p.115)/Exposure Bracketing (p.148)
Appears when EV compensation is available or in use.
Appears when set to [Exposure Bracketing].
File Format (p.188)
Displays the image save format in RAW/RAW+ format.
Not displayed in JPEG format.
• The AF point in use for autofocus appears in red (superimposed) when the
shutter release button is pressed halfway. (p.122)• When [13. AF Button Function] is set to [Cancel AF] in the [A Custom Setting
2] menu, press the = button to display \ in the viewfinder. (p.120)• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayedin the viewfinder. Even if the number of recordable images is 10,000 or more,[9999] is displayed.

33

LCD Panel
The following information appears in the LCD panel on top of the camera.

3 4

1

5
6
7
8
9
10

2

11

12

13

14

1
2
3
4
5

Shutter speed>: Red-eye reduction functionis activated
ApertureMulti-exposure (p.146)
3: Auto Flash Discharge
Mirror Lock-up shooting (p.141)
Q : Slow-speed Sync
EV bar (p.115)/Electronic Level
E : Trailing Curtain Sync
(p.65)w: Wireless
6 EV Compensation (p.115)/
12 Drive Mode (p.82)
Exposure Bracketing (p.148)
9: Single Frame Shooting
7 Battery level (p.46)
j: Continuous Shooting
8 Flash Exposure Compensationg: Self-Timer shooting(p.76)
W : Remote Control shooting
9 Sensitivity/EV compensation value 13 File Format (p.188)
10 ISO/ISO AUTO
1 : RAW capture
Appears when sensitivity is
1P: RAW+JPEG capture
displayed.
14 Remaining image storage capacity/
USB connection mode (p.275)
11 Flash Mode (p.72)b: Built-in flash is ready
Pc-S : MSC mode
(when blinking, flash
Pc-P : PTP mode
should be used)
LCD panel is illuminated when the exposure metering is performed. You can
set it to not illuminate in [29. LCD Panel Illumination] in the [A Custom
Setting 5] menu (p.87).

Before Using Your Camera

1How to Change Function Settings

34

1
Before Using Your Camera

Function settings can be changed using the direct keys, the control panel orthe menu. Some functions can be changed using both the control panel andmenu.
This section explains the basic ways to change function settings.

Using the Direct Keys
By pressing the four-way controller (2345) in Capture mode you canset [Drive Mode], [Flash Mode], [White Balance] and [Custom Image].
(p.82)
Below, how to set to the flash mode will be explained as an example.

1

Press the four-way controller (3)in Capture mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (45)to select a flash mode.

Flash Mode
Flash On

0.0
MENU Cancel

3

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

OK OK

35

Using the Control Panel
While shooting, the current settings can be checked on the status screen.
You can also switch the display to the control panel and change settings.
Following, how to set the JPEG quality will be explained as an example.

Before Using Your Camera

1

Check the status screen and thenpress the M button.
The control panel appears.

Press the M button if the status
screen is not displayed.

P

AF.S

OFF

SHIFT

1/ 2000
ISO

AUTO

F 2.8
±0.0
±0±0

1600

-5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG 14M

2

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select an item you
want to change the setting for.
You cannot select an item that cannot bechanged.

Use the front e-dial (R) or reare-dial (S) to change thesetting.

[

37]

[

37]

[

37]

ISO AUTO Setting
ISO

AUTO

200-1600
DR
200

WB

OFF

JPEG

14M

05/05/ ’09

3

1

HDR
OFF

10:30AMJPEG Quality
ISO

AUTO

200-1600
D -R
200

WB

OFF

JPEG

14M

05/05/ ’09

HDR
OFF

10:30AM36

4

Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to the status screen
and is ready to take a picture.

1
Before Using Your Camera• Press the 4 button in Step 3 on p.35 to display the setting screen for theselected item. Use the setting screen to set the settings for [Extended
Bracketing], [Digital Filter] and other items.
• The status screen and control panel are not displayed when Live View
(p.156) is displayed. Make the settings in the [A Rec. Mode] menu.

Using the Menus
This section explains operation methods for the [A Rec. Mode],[Q Playback], [R Set-up] and [A Custom Setting] menus.
Following, how to set [Program Line] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu will be
explained as an example.

1

Press the 3 button in
Capture mode.
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu appears on
the monitor.
If the 3 button is pressed in Playback
mode, the [Q Playback 1] menu appears.

2

37
Press the four-way controller (5)or turn the rear e-dial (S) to theright (toward y).

1 2 3 4File Format
JPEG
JPEG Recorded Pixels 14M
JPEG Quality
ISO AUTO Setting
D-Range Setting
Lens Correction

3

4

Use the four-way controller (23)to choose an item.

Press the four-way controller(5).
Available settings are displayed.
Use the pop-up menu if there is one.

5

Use the four-way controller (23)to select a setting.

1 2 3 4Program Line
Extended Bracketing
HDR Capture
Digital Filter
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
Composition Adjust.
MENU Exit

OFF

Off
OFF

1 2 3 4Program Line
Extended Bracketing
HDR Capture
Digital Filter
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
Composition Adjust.
MENU Cancel

OFF

Off
OFF

OK OK

1 2 3 4Program Line
Extended Bracketing
HDR Capture
Digital Filter
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
Composition Adjust.
MENU Cancel

OK OK

1
Before Using Your Camera

Each time the four-way controller (5) ispressed, the menu will change in thefollowing sequence: [A Rec. Mode 2],[A Rec. Mode 3], [A Rec. Mode 4],
MENU Exit[Q Playback 1] ··· [A Rec. Mode 1].
When the front e-dial (R) is turned to
the right, the menu will change in the following sequence:[A Rec. Mode 1], [Q Playback 1], [R Set-up 1], [A Custom Setting 1].

38

1

6

Press the 4 button.

Before Using Your Camera

The camera returns to the menu screen.
Next, set other items.
Press the 3 button to exit the menu
and the screen that was displayed before
selecting the menu appears again.

Even after you press the 3 button and close the menu screen, yoursettings will not be saved if the camera is turned off improperly (such as byremoving the battery while the camera is on).
Refer to the following pages for details on each menu item.
• [A Rec. Mode] menu 1 p.83
• [Q Playback] menu 1 p.213• [R Set-up] menu 1 p.254• [A Custom Setting] menu 1 p.85

Using the Mode Dial

39

You can switch the exposure modes by setting the icons on the mode dial
to the dial indicator.
Turn the mode dial while pressing the mode dial lock button.

Before Using Your Camera

Mode dial

Dial indicator

Mode dial lock button

Mode

Characteristics

1

Page

A (USER)

Lets you capture images with the saved
Capture mode.

p.207

B (Green)

Lets you capture images with fully automatic
settings.

p.95

e (Hyper-program)

Automatically sets the shutter speed andaperture to the proper exposure according to
Program Line when taking pictures. You can
use the front and rear e-dials to switch to
shutter priority or aperture priority.

p.96

K (Sensitivity Priority)

Automatically sets the shutter speed andaperture to the proper exposure according to
the set sensitivity.

p.98

b (Shutter Priority)

Lets you set the desired shutter speed forexpressing moving subjects.

p.100

c (Aperture Priority)

Lets you set the aperture for controlling thedepth of field.

p.102

L (Shutter & Aperture
Priority)

Automatically sets the sensitivity so that the
manually set shutter speed and aperture will
give the proper exposure according to thebrightness of the subject.

p.104

a (Hyper-manual)Lets you set shutter speed and aperture tocapture the picture with creative intent.

p.107

40
Mode

1
Before Using Your Camera

CharacteristicsPage

p (Bulb)

Lets you capture images that require slow
shutter speeds such as fireworks and night
scenes.

p.110

M (Flash X-sync Speed)

The shutter speed is locked at 1/180
seconds. Use this when using an external
flash that does not automatically change the
shutter speed.

p.112

C (Movie)

Use this to record movies.

p.163

2 Getting Started
This chapter explains your first steps from purchasing thecamera to taking pictures. Be sure to read it and follow the
instructions.

Attaching the Strap ..............................................42
Using the Battery ..................................................43
Inserting/Removing the SD Memory Card .........49
Attaching the Lens ...............................................53
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter ........................55
Turning the Camera On and Off ..........................56
Initial Settings .......................................................57

Attaching the Strap

42

1

Pass the end of the strap throughthe protective cover andtriangular ring.

2
Getting Started

2

3

Secure the end of the strap on the inside of the clasp.

Attach the other end of the strap in the same manner as
described above.

Using the Battery

43

Insert the battery into the camera. Use only a D-LI90 battery.

Charging the Battery

Indicator lamp
Lithium-ion battery

AC plug cordBattery charger

1
2
3

Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.
Face the 2 mark on the exclusive battery up and insert it
into the battery charger.
The indicator lamp is lit during charging.
The indicator lamp turns off when the battery is fully charged.

4

When the battery is fully charged, remove the battery fromthe battery charger.

2
Getting Started

When using the battery for the first time, or when the battery has not beenused in a long time, or when [Battery depleted] appears, recharge thebattery.
Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible
cord, rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6ft (1.8m)”

44• Do not use the provided battery charger to charge batteries other thanrechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI90. Charging other batteries may cause
damage or heating.
• If the battery is correctly oriented and inserted into the battery charger but theindicator lamp is not lit, the battery is faulty. Install a new battery in thecamera.
• The maximum charging time is approximately 390 minutes. Charge in alocation where the temperature is between 0°C and 40°C. (Charge timedepends on temperature and remaining battery power.)• If usage time is reduced even when properly charged, the battery hasreached the end of its usage span. Install a new battery in the camera.

2
Getting Started

Inserting/Removing the Battery
When using the battery for the first time, charge the battery and insert it into
the camera.
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the battery while the power is on.
• Remove the battery when you will not use the camera for a long while. The
battery may leak.
• If the date and time settings have been reset when you insert a new battery
after a long time, follow the procedure for [Setting the Date and Time]. (p.61)• Insert the battery correctly. If the battery is inserted incorrectly, it may cause
camera breakdown. Wipe the electrodes of the battery with a soft dry cloth
before inserting.
• Be careful as the camera or battery may become hot when the camera isused continuously for a long period of time.

1

Open the battery cover.
Lift the battery cover unlock knob, turntowards OPEN (1) to unlock, and thenpull the cover open (2).

1

2

2

45
Face the 2 mark on the battery towards the outside of thecamera, push the battery lock lever in the direction of thearrow (3) and insert the battery.

3

Battery lock lever

3

Close the battery cover (4) andturn the battery cover unlock
knob towards CLOSE (5) to
lock.

4
5

Stow the battery cover unlock knob after
closing the battery cover.

Use the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when using the camera for a
prolonged period. (p.47)

2
Getting Started

Insert until the battery locks.
To remove the battery, push thebattery lock lever in the directionof the arrow (3) with your hand.
Remove the battery when it popsout slightly.

46

Battery Level Indicator
You can confirm remaining battery level by checking the w/A
displayed on the status screen and LCD panel.
Status screen

LCD panel

Battery levelw (Green)A

Battery is full.

2x (Green)

B

Battery is close to full.

Getting Startedy (Yellow)

C

Battery is running low.

z (Red)D lit

Battery is almost empty.

“Battery depleted”

D blinks

The camera turns off after displaying themessage. (D continues blinking on the
LCD panel.)• y, z (red), C or D may appear even when the battery level issufficient if the camera is used at low temperatures or when performing
continuous shooting consecutively. In this sort of case, turn the camera off
and on again. If w or A appears, you can use the camera.
• w and A are not displayed when using the AC adapter.

Approximate Image Storage Capacity andPlayback Time (Battery Fully Charged)
Battery
D-LI90Flash photography(Temperature)

Normalrecording

50% use100% use(23°C)

980

740

610

440 minutes( 0°C)

810

680

560

400 minutes

Playback time

The picture storage capacity (flash use 50%) is based on measuring conditions inaccordance with CIPA standards and the others are based on our measuringconditions. Some deviation from the above figures may occur in actual use
depending on shooting mode and shooting conditions.

47• Battery performance temporarily decreases as the temperature decreases.
When using the camera in cold climates, have extra batteries on hand andkeep them warm in your pocket. Battery performance will return to normalwhen returned to room temperature.
• Have extra batteries ready when traveling overseas, taking pictures in cold
climates, or when you will be taking a lot of pictures.
• If usage time is reduced even when properly charged, the battery hasreached the end of its usage span. Install a new battery in the camera.

2

We recommend using the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when using
the monitor for a long time or when connecting to your PC or AV device.

12

3

Make sure that the camera is turned off.
Open the terminal cover.

Face the 2 mark on the DC
terminal of the AC adapter
towards the 2 mark on thecamera, and connect the DC
terminal to the DC input terminalof the camera.

Getting Started

Using the AC Adapter (Optional)

48

2

4
5

Connect the AC plug cord to the AC adapter.
Plug the AC cord into the power outlet.
• Make sure the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting theAC adapter.
• Make sure connections are secure between the terminals. SD Memory Cardand data will be corrupted if disconnected while the camera is recording or
reading data.

Getting Started• Be sure to read the AC adapter kit K-AC50 Operating Manual when using theAC adapter.
• The battery in your camera will not charge when connected to the AC
adapter.

Inserting/Removing the SD Memory
Card

49

This camera uses either an SD Memory Card or an SDHC Memory Card.
(Both cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards hereafter.) Make sure thecamera is turned off before inserting or removing the SD Memory Card(commercially available).

1
2

Make sure that the camera is turned off.
Slide the card cover in the
direction of the arrow (1) andthen lift it to open (2).

123Insert the card all the way with
the SD Memory Card label toward
the monitor.

Push the SD Memory Card in once toremove.

2
Getting Started• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while the card access lamp is lit.
• Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or
has been used on other cameras or digital devices. Refer to “Formatting the
SD Memory Card” (p.256) for details on formatting.
• Use a high-speed memory card when recording movies. If the write speed
cannot keep up with the recording speed, the writing may stop during
recording.

50

4Close the card cover (3) andthen slide it in the direction of thearrow (4).

4
32
Getting Started

Be sure to fully close the card cover. The camera will not turn on if the card
cover is open.

Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with awrite-protect switch. Setting the switch to
LOCK prevents new data from being
recorded on the card, the stored data fromWrite-protect
being deleted, and the card from being
switchformatted by the camera or computer.
• Care should be taken when removing the
SD Memory Card immediately after using the camera because the card may
be hot.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn the camera off while images arebeing played back or saved to the card, or the camera is connected to acomputer with the USB cable. This may cause the data to be lost or the card
to be damaged.
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it awayfrom water and store away from high temperatures.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may bedamaged and become unusable.
• Data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following circumstances.
We do not accept any liability for data that are deleted if(1) the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.
(2) the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electricalinterference.
(3) the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.
(4) the SD Memory Card is ejected or the battery is removed while the data on
the card are being recorded or accessed.
• If it is not used for a long time, the data on the card may become unreadable.
Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on a computer.
• Avoid using or storing the card where it may be exposed to static electricity orelectrical interference.

51

Recorded Pixels and Quality Level
When the File Format is JPEG
Choose the number of pixels (size) and quality level (JPEG datacompression rate) of pictures according to how you intend to use thepictures you have taken.
Pictures with larger recorded pixels or more Es are clearer when printed.
The number of pictures that can be taken (the number of pictures that canbe recorded on an SD Memory Card) decreases with larger file sizes.
The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the quality
level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of otherfactors so you do not need to select more than the required number ofpixels. For example, to print in postcard size, i (1728×1152) isadequate. Set the appropriate recorded size and quality level depending
on purpose.
Choose the appropriate number of recorded pixels and quality level for
JPEG images in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu or on the control panel.
1 Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.186)
1 Setting the JPEG Quality Level (p.187)

2
Getting Started• Avoid using or storing the card in direct sunlight or where it may be exposed to
rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.
• Format new SD Memory Cards. Also format SD Memory Cards used with othercameras.
1 Formatting the SD Memory Card (p.256)• Please note that formatting the SD Memory Card will not necessarily delete thedata so that they cannot be recovered using off the shelf data recovery
software. If you are going to discard, give away or sell your SD Memory Card
you should ensure that the data on the card are completely deleted or the card
itself is destroyed if it contains any personal or sensitive information. There are
off the shelf secure data deletion software programs available that willcompletely delete the data.
In any case the data on your SD Memory Card should be managed at your own
risk.

52

JPEG Recorded Pixels, JPEG Quality and Approximate Image
Storage Capacity(When using a 1 GB SD Memory Card)
JPEG Quality

JPEG Rec. Pixels

2

Z
PremiumCBest

D
BetterE
Good

Getting Started

W(4672×3104)

73

117

206

408

J

(3936×2624)

102

163

289

564

P

(3072×2048)

167

267

468

902

i

(1728×1152)

516

805

1373

2518

• The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting
conditions, shooting mode and SD Memory Card, etc.
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are
divided into folders of 500 images each. However, in Auto Bracket, images will
be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed, even if the number ofimages exceeds 500.

When the File Format is RAW
With the Q, you can record in the versatile JPEG format or the highquality and editable RAW format. For RAW file format, you can select the
PENTAX original PEF format or general-purpose DNG (Digital Negative)
format designed by Adobe Systems. On a 1 GB SD Memory Card, you canrecord up to 40 images in PEF format or DNG format.
1 Setting the File Format (p.188)

Attaching the Lens

53

Attach a proper lens to the camera’s body.
When you use one of the following lenses with the Q, all the camera’s
exposure modes will be available.
(a) DA, DA L, D FA, FA J lenses(b) Lenses with an Aperture s (Auto) position, when used in thes position• When lenses described in (b) are used in a position other than s, somefunctions will be restricted. See “Notes on [37. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.294).
• With factory default settings, the camera will not work with other lenses andaccessories. Set [37. Using Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting 6] menu
to [Permitted] to use them. (p.294)

1
2

Make sure that the camera is turned off.
Remove the body mount cover(1) and lens mount cover (2).
Be sure to put the lens down with the lens
mount side facing upward to protect thelens mount from damage after removal.

3

Align the Lens mount index (reddots; 3) on the camera and thelens, and secure by turning thelens clockwise until it clicks.
After attaching, turn the lenscounterclockwise to check that the lens islocked in place.

3

Getting Started

Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the lens to prevent
unexpected lens movement.

2

54

4

Remove the front lens cap bypushing the indicated portions
inward.

2
Getting Started

To detach the lens, hold down the lensunlock button (4) and turn the lenscounterclockwise.

4• We assume no responsibility nor liability for accidents, damages andmalfunctions resulting from the use of lenses made by other manufacturers.
• The camera body and lens mount incorporate lens information contacts andan AF coupler. Dirt, dust, or corrosion may damage the electrical system.
When necessary, clean the contacts with a soft dry cloth.

The body mount cover (1) is a cover to prevent scratches and block dust whenshipped. Body Mount Cap K is sold separately and has a lock function. (p.304)

Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter

55

Adjust the viewfinder to suit your eyesight.
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image clearly, slide the diopter
adjustment lever sideways.
You can adjust the diopter from approximately -2.5 to +1.5 m-1.
2

Look through the viewfinder andslide the diopter adjustment leverleft or right.

Getting Started

1

Adjust the lever until the AF frame in the
viewfinder appears sharply focused.
Point the camera at a white wall or otherbright and consistent surface.

AF frame• The Eyecup FR is attached to the viewfinder portion when the camera leaves
the factory. Diopter adjustment is available with the Eyecup FR attached.
However, adjustment is easier with the eyecup removed.
• To remove the Eyecup FR, press in one
side and pull it out in the direction of thearrow.
To attach the Eyecup FR, align it with thegroove on the viewfinder eyepiece andpush it into position.
• If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image
clearly even if you set the diopter
adjustment lever, use an optional diopter
correction lens adapter M. However, theEyecup FR must be removed to use thisadapter. (p.302)

Turning the Camera On and Off

56

1
2

Turn the main switch to [ON].
The camera will turn on.
Set the main switch to the position [OFF]to turn off the camera.

Getting Started• Always turn the camera off when not in use.
• The power will automatically turn off when you do not perform any operations
within a set period of time. To reactivate the camera after it turns off
automatically, turn it on again or perform any of the following.
- The shutter release button is pressed halfway- The Q button is pressed- The M button is pressed• By default, the camera is set to power off automatically after 1 minute ofinactivity. You can change the setting in [Auto Power Off] in the [R Set-up 3]
menu. (p.270)

Initial Settings

If the [Date Adjustment] screen appears, set
the date and time by following the procedurein “Setting the Date and Time” (p.61).

2
MENU Cancel

OK OK

Date Adjustment
Date Format

mm/dd/yy 24h

Date

01 / 01 / 200900 : 00

Time

Settings complete
MENU Cancel

Setting the Display Language
You can choose the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.
are displayed from the following: English, French, German, Spanish,Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,
Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Chinese (traditional/
simplified) and Japanese.

1

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select the desired
language.

MENU Cancel

OK OK

Getting Started

The first time the camera is turned on after
purchasing, the [Language/] screen
appears on the monitor. Follow theprocedure below to set the language
displayed on the monitor and the current
date and time. Once setting is done, thesewill not need to be set again when turning
your camera on.

57

58

2

Press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen for theselected language appears.
Press the four-way controller (3) twice andproceed to Step 10 on p.59 if [Hometown]
does not have to be changed.

Initial Setting
EnglishNew York
Text Size

Standard

Settings complete

2
Getting Started

MENU Cancel

3

Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to W.

4

Press the four-way controller (5).
The [W Hometown] screen appears.

5

Use the four-way controller (45)to select a city.

Hometown

New York
DST

10:00

MENU Cancel

6

Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to [DST] (daylight saving time).

7
8

Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Initial Setting] screen.

9

Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to [Text Size].

OK OK

10 Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to select [Standard] or[Large].

Selecting [Large] magnifies the selected
menu item.

59
Initial Setting
EnglishNew York
Text Size

Standard
Large
Settings complete

MENU Cancel

to select [Settings complete].

Initial Setting
EnglishNew York
Text Size

Standard

Settings complete
MENU Cancel

OK OK

13 Press the 4 button.
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears.
In this manual, the menu screens hereafter are described with [Text Size] set
to [Standard].

2
Getting Started

11 Press the 4 button.
12 Use the four-way controller (3)

OK OK

60
When an Incorrect Language is Set
When you mistakenly select a language in the [Language/] screen
and proceed to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can perform thefollowing operations to set the correct language.
If you have proceeded to switch the camera to Capture mode (and thecamera is ready to take a picture), perform the following operations from
Step 2 to set the correct language.
2

1

Getting Started

2
3
4
5
6

Press the 3 button once todisplay the guides on themonitor.
The screen shown on the right is an
example of the guides displayed. The
displayed screen will vary depending on
the selected language.
The guides appear on the monitor for 3
seconds.

P

RAW RAWAF

2009/05/05

P

Tv
Av

10:30AM

Press the 3 button once.
[A 1] is displayed in the upper tab.

Press the four-way controller (5) five times.
[R 1] is displayed in the upper tab.

Press the four-way controller (3) to select [Language/].
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Language/] screen appears.

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select a desired
language and press the 4 button.
The [R Set-up 1] menu in the selected language appears.
Refer to the following pages and set the desired city for [Hometown]
and the current date and time as necessary.
• To change the hometown: “Setting the World Time” (p.258)• To change the date and time: “Changing the Date Display” (p.258)

61• When the hometown and the date and time are not set, the [Initial Setting]screen or [Date Adjustment] screen will be displayed when the camera isturned on again.
• If you have not proceeded to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can reselecta language using the four-way controller (5) in the [Language/] screen.

Setting the Date and Time

2

1

Getting Started

Set the current date and time and the display style.

Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].

2

Use the four-way controller (23)to choose the date format.
Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd].

Date Adjustment
Date Format

24h
mm/dd/yy/ /Date01 / 01 / 200900 : 00

Time

Settings complete
MENU Cancel

3

OK OK

Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [24h].

4

Use the four-way controller(23) to select 24h (24-hour
display) or 12h (12-hour display).

Date Adjustment
Date Format

24h
mm/dd/yy/ /Date01 / 01 / 200900 : 00

Time

Settings complete
MENU Cancel

5

Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame returns to [Date Format].

OK OK

62

6

Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to [Date].

7

Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to the month.

2

8

Use the four-way controller (23)to set the month.

Getting Started

Set the day and year in the same manner.
Next, set the time.
If you select [12h] in Step 4, the setting
switches between am and pm dependingon the time.

9

Use the four-way controller (3)to select [Settings complete].

Date Adjustment
Date Format

mm/dd/yy 24h

Date

01 / 01 / 200900 : 00

Time

Settings complete
MENU Cancel

OK OK

Date Adjustment
Date Format

mm/dd/yy 24h

Date

01 / 01 / 2009Time

00 : 00
Settings complete

MENU Cancel

OK OK

10 Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.
If you set the date and time with the menu operations, the screen will
return to the [R Set-up 1] menu. In this case, press the 3 button.
Pressing the 3 button while adjusting the date and time cancels thesettings made so far and switches the camera to Capture mode. If the poweris turned on without the date and time set, the [Date Adjustment] screen isdisplayed if the initial settings have been completed. You can also set the date
and time later by menu operations. (p.258)• When you press the 4 button in Step 10, the camera clock is reset to 00
seconds. To set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal(on the TV, radio, etc.) reaches 00 seconds.
• You can change the language and the date and time settings with the menu
operations. (p.258, p.261)

3 Basic Operations
This chapter explains basic operations for shooting by
setting mode dial to Green mode (automatic exposure
according to the program line set to j) to ensure
successful capturing.
For information about advanced functions and settings fortaking pictures, refer to chapter 4 and onward.

Basic Shooting Operation ...................................64
Using a Zoom Lens ..............................................71
Using the Built-in Flash .......................................72
Playing Back Images ............................................78

64

Basic Shooting Operation

Holding the Camera
How you hold the camera is important when taking pictures.
• Hold the camera firmly with both hands and keep your elbows close
to your body.
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture.
3
Basic Operations
Horizontal position

Vertical position• To reduce camera shake, support your body or the camera on a solid object
such as a table, tree, or wall.
• Although there are individual differences among photographers, the shutter
speed for a handheld camera is generally 1/(focal length ×1.5). For example,
it is 1/75 of a second for a focal length of 50 mm and 1/150 of a second for
100 mm. Use a tripod or the Shake Reduction function (p.132) when using alower shutter speed.
• When using a telephoto lens, a tripod that is heavier than the total weight ofthe camera and lens is recommended to avoid camera shake.
• Do not use the Shake Reduction function when using the camera on a tripod.
(p.132)

65
When the Camera is not Level
This camera is equipped with an electronic level for detecting whether
the camera is level. When the camera is not level, this is indicated on
the bar graph in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel. This is usefulwhen holding the camera.

3

When tilted 5° to the left

When held vertically and tilted 3° to the right[Electronic Level] is P (Off) by default. Set in the [A Rec. Mode 3]
menu. (p.266)
The composition can also be adjusted in the camera when thecamera is stabilized using a tripod. (p.203)

Basic Operations

When level (at 0°)

66

Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal
Settings
The Q features various capture modes, focus modes, and drive
modes for expressing your photographic vision. This section explains how
to take pictures by simply pressing the shutter release button.

1

Set the mode dial to B.
Turn the mode dial while pressing themode dial lock button.
The exposure mode changes to B
(Green) mode. In B, the proper
exposure is determined by the camera
and the shutter speed and aperture areautomatically set.

3
Basic Operations

Mode dial lock button2

Set the focus mode lever to l.
The focus mode changes to l
(Autofocus/Single) mode. In l, thelens automatically focuses when the
shutter release button is pressed halfway.
When the image is focused, the shutter
can be released. (p.118)

3

67
Look through the viewfinder toview the subject.
A zoom lens can be used to change thesize of the subject in the viewfinder.
(p.71)

4

Position the subject inside theAF frame and press the shutter
release button halfway.

5

Press the shutter release button
fully.
The picture is taken.

Basic Operations

The autofocus system operates. The
focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.
AF assist light turns on in a dark or backlit
location, but the flash does not pop up
automatically. If the flash is necessary,
the flash status E blinks in the viewfinder.
Press the E button to pop up the flash.
1 Operating the shutter release button(p.69)
1 Subjects that are Difficult to Focus
on (p.70)
1 Using the Built-in Flash (p.72)
1 Selecting the Focusing Area (AFPoint) (p.122)

3

Flash
status

Focus indicator

68

3

6

Review the captured image on
the monitor.
The image appears for 1 second on themonitor shortly after capturing (InstantReview).
1 Setting the Display for InstantReview (p.263)
You can magnify the image during InstantReview with the rear e-dial (S). (p.214)
You can delete the image during InstantReview by pressing the i button. (p.79)

Basic Operations

Delete• For details on using B (Green) mode, see p.95.
• You can set the camera so that pressing the = button will focus
automatically, in the same way as pressing the shutter release button
halfway. (p.120)• You can preview the image on the monitor and check composition, exposure,and focus before taking pictures. (p.129)

69
Operating the shutter release button
The shutter release button has two working positions.

Not pressed

Pressed halfway Pressed fully(first position) (second position)• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture to prevent
camera shake.
• Practice pressing the shutter release button halfway/fully to learn
where the first position and second position are.
• The viewfinder indicators stay on while the shutter release button ispressed halfway. The indicators stay on for about 10 seconds (default
setting) while the exposure metering timer is on after the button isreleased. (p.31, p.114)

3
Basic Operations

Pressing it down halfway (first position) turns on the viewfinder
indicators and the autofocus system operates. Pressing it fully(second position) takes a picture.

70
Subjects that are Difficult to Focus on
The autofocus mechanism is not perfect. Focusing may be difficult
when taking pictures under the following conditions. These also apply
to manual focusing using the focus indicator ] in the viewfinder.

3
Basic Operations(a) Extremely low-contrast subjects such as a white wall in thefocusing area.
(b) Subjects which do not reflect much light within the focusingarea.
(c) Fast moving objects.
(d) Strongly reflected light or strong backlighting (brightbackground).
(e) If repeating vertical or horizontal line patterns appear within
the focusing area.
(f) Multiple subjects in the foreground and background within thefocusing area.
If the subject cannot be focused automatically, set the focus modelever to \ and use the manual focus mode to focus on the subject
with the aid of the matte field in the viewfinder. (p.127)
Subject may not be focused even when ] (focus indicator) is displayedwhen (e) and (f) above apply.

Using a Zoom Lens

71

Enlarge the subject (telephoto) or capture a wider area (wide angle) witha zoom lens. Adjust it to the desired size and take the picture.

1

Turn the zoom ring to the right orleft.
Turn the zoom ring clockwise fortelephoto and counterclockwise for wide
angle.

3
Basic Operations

Wide Angle

Telephoto• The smaller the number of the displayed focal length, the wider the angle.
The larger the number, the more magnified the image appears.
• Power Zoom (Auto Zoom) is available if a Power Zoom compatible FA lens
is used with this camera. (p.292)

72

Using the Built-in FlashUse the following procedures to take pictures in low light or backlit
conditions or when you want to manually use the built-in flash.
The built-in flash is optimum at about 0.7 m to 5 m from the subject.
Exposure will not be properly controlled and vignetting (darkening of thecorners of the image due to a lack of light) may occur when used at a
distance closer than 0.7 m (this distance varies slightly depending on thelens being used and set sensitivity (p.171)).

3
Basic Operations

Compatibility of built-in flash and lensVignetting may occur depending on the lens being used and thecapture conditions. We recommend taking a test shot to confirm this.
1 Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash (p.172)• When using the built-in flash, remove the lens hood before shooting.
• The built-in flash fully discharges for lenses without a function to set
aperture lens ring to s (Auto).

For details on the built-in flash and instructions on how to take pictures with theexternal flash, refer to the “Using the Flash” (p.167).

Setting the Flash Mode
Flash ModeFlashC AutoDischarge

Function
Discharges the flash automatically in dark or backlit
conditions.

Flash+
Lights a red-eye reduction light before automatic
D AutoRed-eye Reduction flash.

E

Flash On

Discharges the flash for each picture.

On+
Lights a red-eye reduction light before discharging
F FlashRed-eye Reduction the flash with Flash On.

G Slow-speed Sync

Sets to a slow shutter speed depending on thebrightness. For example, when using this to shoot a
portrait with the sunset in the background, both theperson and the background are captured beautifully.

73
Flash Mode

Function

Sync+ Lights a red-eye reduction light before discharging
H Slow-speed
Red-eyethe flash with Slow-speed Sync.

I Trailing Curtain
k SyncDischarges flash immediately before closing the
shutter curtain. Capture moving images as if they areleaving a trail behind. (p.170)

r Wireless Mode

You can synchronize a dedicated external flash(AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) without using a sync
cord. (p.176)

The flash modes that can be selected differ depending on the exposure
mode.
Selectable Flash Mode

Restrictions
No flash compensation

B

C/D

b/L/a/p

E/F/k/r

–

M

E/F/r

–

e/c/K

E/F/G/H/I/r–

A

According to the saved settings

1

Press the four-way controller (3)in Capture mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (45)to select a flash mode.

Flash Mode
Flash On

When not in B (Green) mode, turn therear e-dial (S) to perform the flash
exposure compensation. (p.76)
0.0
MENU Cancel

OK OK

Basic Operations

Exposure Mode

3

74

3

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

3

Using Built-in Flash

Basic Operations

1

Press the E button.

The built-in flash pops up and begins
charging. When the flash is fully charged,
E appears in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel. (p.31, p.33)

2

Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when focused.

3

Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
When the mode dial is at B, the flash is not discharged if the lighting
conditions do not require flash for correction even when the flash is
popped up.
The Flash On is used if the flash is popped up when the mode dial is at
a setting other than B.

475
Push down on the portion
indicated in the illustration to
retract the flash.

Using Red-eye Reduction FlashThe red-eye reduction function on this camera reduces red-eye bydischarging the flash twice. With the red-eye reduction function, thepre-flash is discharged just before the shutter is released. This
reduces pupil dilation. The main flash is then discharged while thepupils are smaller, reducing the red-eye effect.
To use the red-eye reduction function, set D in B mode, or F or
H in other modes.

3
Basic Operations“Red-eye” is the phenomenon where eyes look reddish in
photographs taken in dark environments with a flash. This is causedby the reflection of the electronic flash in the retina of the eye. Redeye occurs because pupils are dilated in dark environments.
This phenomenon cannot be averted but the following measures canbe used to combat it.
• Brighten the surroundings when shooting.
• Set to wide angle and move closer to the subject if a zoom lensis in use.
• Use a flash that supports red-eye reduction.
• Position the flash as far away from the camera as possible whenusing an external flash.

76
Daylight-Sync Shooting
In daylight conditions, the flash will eliminate shadows when a portrait
picture is taken with a person’s face cast in shadow. Use of the flashin this way is called Daylight-Sync shooting. Flash On is used whenshooting with Daylight-Sync shooting.

3

Taking pictures (in e mode)
1 Pop up the flash manually and confirm that the flash mode is set
to E.
2 Confirm that the flash is fully charged.
3 Take a picture.

Basic Operations
Without Daylight-Sync

With Daylight-Sync

The picture may be overexposed if the background is too bright.

Compensating Flash Output
You can change the flash output in a range of -2.0 to +1.0. The flash
compensation values are as follows for 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV.
Step interval

Flash compensation

1/3 EV-2.0, -1.7, -1.3, -1.0, -0.7, -0.3, 0.0, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0

1/2 EV-2.0, -1.5, -1.0, -0.5, 0.0, +0.5, +1.0

Set interval of steps in [1. EV Steps] (p.116) in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.

77

Set the flash compensation value by turning
the rear e-dial (S) in the [Flash Mode]
screen. Pressing the | (Green) button
returns the flash exposure compensation to
the default setting (0.0).

Flash Mode
Flash On

0.0
MENU Cancel

OK OK

Allowing Shooting while Charging FlashYou can also shoot while the flash is being
charged.
Select [On] for [30. Release While Charging]in the [A Custom Setting 5] menu (p.87).
Pictures cannot be taken while the flash is
charging by default.

30. Release While Charging
1 Off
2 On

Enables shutter release
while the built-in
flash is charging

3
Basic Operations• The flash exposure compensation cannot be set in B (Green) mode.
• N appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel during the flash exposurecompensation. (p.31, p.33)• If the maximum flash output is exceeded when corrected to the plus (+) side,
no compensation will be effective.
• Compensating to the minus (-) side may not affect the image if the subject is
too close, the aperture value is small or the sensitivity is high.
• The flash compensation is also effective for external flash units which support
P-TTL auto flash mode.

Playing Back Images

78

Playing Back Images
You can play back still pictures and movies shot with the camera.
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software to play backpictures using a computer. Refer to the provided “Quick Guide” for details on
the software.

3
Basic Operations

1

Press the Q button.
The camera enters Playback mode andthe most recently captured image (image
with the highest file number) is displayedon the monitor. (For movies, only the first
frame is displayed on the monitor.)
Press the M button during playback
to switch the information display such as
the image data for the displayed image.
Refer to p.25 for display information
details.

2

Press the four-way controller(45).
4 : The previous image appears.
5 : The next image appears.
You can display the next or previous
image by turning the front e-dial (R).

Refer to “Playback Functions” (p.211) for playback function details.

79

Deleting Images
You can delete one image at a time.
• Deleted images cannot be restored.
• Protected images cannot be deleted. (p.231)

1

3

Press the i button.

Basic Operations

2

Press the Q button and use the four-way controller (45)to select an image to delete.

The delete screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Delete].

100-0105

Select the file format to delete for images
saved in RAW+ format.
Deletes only the JPEG
Delete JPEG
image.
Deletes only the RAW
Delete RAW
image.

DeleteCancel
OK OK

DeleteDeletes both file formats.
RAW+JPEG

4

Press the 4 button.
The image is deleted.
When deleting multiple images at once, refer to “Deleting Multiple Images”(p.227).

80

Memo

4 Shooting Functions
This chapter describes the various basic and advanced
shooting functions available with the Q.

How to Operate the Shooting Functions ............82
Setting the Exposure ...........................................88
Focusing .............................................................118
Checking the Composition, Exposure and Focus
Before Shooting (Preview) ................................129
Preventing Camera Shake during Shutter Release..............................................................................132
Taking Pictures Continuously ...........................143
Shooting while Adjusting the Settings (AutoBracket) ...............................................................148
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filter ..................153
Shooting with the Live View ..............................156

82

How to Operate the Shooting
Functions
You can change capture-related settings using the direct keys, control
panel, [A Rec. Mode] menus or [A Custom Setting] menus.
For details on how to operate the menus, see “Using the Menus” (p.36).

Direct Keys Setting Items
4

Press the four-way controller (2345) in
Capture mode to set the following items.

Shooting Functions

Key

Item

Function

Page

2

Drive Mode

Sets Continuous Shooting, Self-Timer,
Remote Control, Auto Bracket or Mirror
Lock-up shooting.

p.143
p.136
p.138
p.148
p.141

3

Flash Mode

Adjusts the method of flash discharge.

p.72

4

White Balance

Adjusts the color balance to match thetype of the light source illuminating the
subject.

p.191

5

Custom Image

Sets the image finishing tone.

p.205

83

Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items
Perform the following settings in the [A Rec.
Mode 1-4] menu.
Press the 3 button in Capture mode todisplay [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.

A1

A2

Item

Function

Page

Exposure Mode*1

Sets the exposure mode when the mode
dial is set to A.

p.209

4

File Format*2

Sets the file format.

p.188

JPEG Recorded
Pixels*2

Sets the recording size of images for
JPEG shooting.

p.186

JPEG Quality*2

Sets the image quality for JPEG shooting.

p.187

Sets the range of automatic correction in
ISO AUTO Setting*2
AUTO.

p.90

D-Range Setting*2

Expands the dynamic range and prevents
bright and dark areas from occurring.

p.199

Shooting Functions

Menu

Lens Correction*2

Corrects distortions and chromaticaberrations of magnification occurring due
to lens properties.

p.201

Program Line*2

Selects Program Line.

p.94

Extended
Bracketing*2

Sets the Extended Bracketing shooting.

p.151

HDR Capture*2

Enables the capture of images at highdynamic range.

p.200

Digital Filter*2

Applies filter effects when taking pictures.

p.153

Multi-exposure

Sets the Multi-exposure shooting.

p.146

Interval Shooting

Sets the interval shooting.

p.144

Composition
Adjust.

Adjusts the Shake Reduction unit for abetter composition position and a morelevel camera.

p.203

84
Menu

Item

Function

Page

Sets the movie settings.

p.160

Live View

Sets the Live View display.

p.157

Status Screen

Sets the status screen display and display
color settings.

p.262

Digital Preview

Sets the Digital Preview settings.

p.129

Instant Review

Sets the Instant Review display settings.

p.263

Electronic Level

Sets whether to display a bar graph of theelectronic level in the viewfinder and on
the LCD panel.

p.266

Horizon Correction

Corrects the tilt of the image.

p.133

Color Space

Sets the color space to use.

p.279

RAW File Format

Sets the file format for RAW shooting.

p.189

RAW Button

Sets the | button function.

p.189

MemorySets the settings to save in the camera
when the power is turned off.

p.281

USER

Saves the current camera settings as
A.

p.207

Shake Reduction*2

Reduces vertical and horizontal camera
shake.

p.133

Input Focal Length

Sets the focal length when using a lens forwhich focal length information cannot be
obtained.

p.135

Movie

A3

4
Shooting Functions

A4*1 Appears only when the mode dial is set to A.
*2 Can be also set using the control panel.

85

Custom Setting Menu Setting Items
Set the [A Custom Setting 1-6] menu to fully use the functions of a SLR
camera.
Menu

A1

FunctionPage

1. EV Steps

Sets the adjustment steps for exposure. p.116

2. Sensitivity Steps

Sets the adjustment steps for ISO
sensitivity.

p.90

3. Expanded
Sensitivity

Expands the upper sensitivity limit.

p.90

4. Meter Operating
Time

Sets the exposure metering time.

p.114

5. AE-L with AF
LockedSets whether to lock exposure value
when focus is locked.

p.126

Sets whether to link the exposure and6. Link AE to AF Point AF point in the focusing area duringmulti-segment metering.

p.114

7. One-PushBracketing

Sets whether to shoot all frames with
one release when using Exposure
Bracketing.

p.150

8. Auto Bracketing
Order

Sets the order for Auto Bracket
shooting.

p.148

9. Auto EV
Compensation

Sets whether to compensate
automatically when the proper exposure
cannot be determined.

10. WB When Using
Flash

Sets the white balance setting whenusing flash.

p.192

11. WB Adjustable
Range

Sets whether to automatically fine-tune
the white balance when specifying thelight source on the white balancesetting.

p.192

Sets whether to leave or adjust the
12. AWB in Tungsten
tungsten light color tone when the whiteLightbalance is set to F.
13. AF Button
Function

Sets the operation for when the =button is pressed.

14. AF with Press
Halfway

Sets whether to use the autofocus when
the shutter release button is pressedhalfway.

4

–

–
p.120
–

Shooting Functions

A2

Item

86
Menu

A3

4
Shooting Functions
A4

Item

FunctionPage

15. Superimpose AF
Area

Sets whether to display the selected AF
point in the viewfinder.

p.122

16. AF with Remote
Control

Sets whether to use the autofocus whenshooting with remote control.

p.140

While using the remote control inp (Bulb) mode, sets whether to start
exposure with a press and stop it with
17. Remote Control inanother press of the release button on
Bulb
the remote control, or to keep the shutter
open as long as the release button on
the remote control is kept pressed.

p.111

18. Slow Shutter
Speed NR

Sets whether to use Noise Reduction
when shooting at slow shutter speeds.

p.92

19. High-ISO Noise
Reduction

Sets whether to use Noise Reduction
when shooting with a high ISO
sensitivity. Select from three levels.

p.92

High-ISO Noise Reduction is activated
20. High-ISO NR Start
when shooting with a higher sensitivity
Levelthan the set sensitivity

p.92

21. Color
Temperature Steps

Sets the adjustment steps for color
temperature.

p.196

22. e-dial in Program

Sets the front and rear e-dials in e
mode.

p.97

23. e-dial in Sv mode

Sets the front and rear e-dials in K
mode.

p.99

24. e-dial in Tv mode

Sets the front and rear e-dials in b
mode.

p.101

25. e-dial in Av mode

Sets the front and rear e-dials in c
mode.

p.103

26. e-dial in TAv & M
modes

Sets the front and rear e-dials in L ora mode.

p.106

27. e-dial in B & X
modes

Sets the front and rear e-dials in p or M
mode.

p.111

28. Green Button in
TAv & M

Selects the exposure adjustment
method when the | button is pressed in
L or a mode.

p.106

87
Menu

A5

FunctionPage

29. LCD Panel
Illumination

Sets whether to illuminate the LCD
panel.

p.33

30. Release While
Charging

Sets whether to release shutter while
the built-in flash is charging.

p.77

31. Flash in WirelessMode

Sets the built-in flash discharge methodin Wireless Mode.

p.177

32. AF Assist Light

Provides an assist light when using theautofocus in dark locations.

–33. Saving Rotation
Info

Sets whether to save rotation
information when shooting.

p.225

34. Auto Image
Rotation

Sets whether to automatically rotate
images when playing back.

p.225

35. Catch-in Focus

When set to [On], if the focus mode is
set to l and a manual focus lens is
attached, catch-in focus shooting isenabled and the shutter is released
automatically when the subject comes
into focus.

p.128

36. AF Adjustment

Adjusts the AF focusing position.

p.121

37. Using Aperture
Ring

Sets whether to enable shutter release
when the lens aperture ring is set to theposition other than s.

p.294

Reset Custom
Functions

Resets all the settings in the [A Custom
Setting 1-6] menu to the defaults.

p.290

4
Shooting Functions

A6

Item

88

Setting the Exposure

Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed
Correct exposure of the subject is determined by the combination of
shutter speed and aperture setting. There are many correct combinationsof shutter speed and aperture for a particular subject. Different
combinations produce different effects.

Effect of Shutter Speed
4
Shooting Functions

By changing the shutter speed, you can manipulate how time is expressedin the pictures you create. Unlike with your own naked eyes, in a picture
you can capture a fraction of a moment or a whole period of time, creating
different effects.
Use the b (Shutter Priority) mode.
Using slower shutter speed
If the subject is moving, the image will be
blurred because the shutter is open
longer.
It is possible to enhance the effect of
motion (rivers, waterfalls, waves, etc.) byintentionally using a slower shutter speed.
Using faster shutter speed
Choosing a faster shutter speed will allow
freezing the action of a moving subject.
A faster shutter speed also helps toprevent camera shake.

Effect of Aperture
By changing the aperture, you can control the depth of the area thatappears in focus in the picture (the depth of field). By either narrowing the
focus to emphasize a single point or giving depth to your picture instead
you can completely change the feel of the picture you create.
Use the c (Aperture Priority) mode.

89

Opening the aperture (reduce theaperture value)
Objects closer and farther than thefocused subject will be more out of focus.
For instance, if you take a picture of aflower against a landscape with theaperture open, the landscape in front andbehind the flower will be blurred,emphasizing only the flower.
Closing the aperture (increase theaperture value)
The range in focus expands forward andbackward. For instance, if you take apicture of a flower against a landscapewith the aperture narrowed, the landscapein front and behind the flower will be infocus.

4

The following table summarizes how the aperture affects the depth offield. The depth of field may also change depending on the lens used
and the distance to the subject.
Open

Close

(Smaller value)(Larger value)

Depth of field

Shallow

Deep

Area of focus

Narrow

Wide

Lens focal length

Longer(Telephoto)

Shorter(Wide-angle)

Distance to thesubject

Near

Far

Aperture• The depth of field for the Q differs depending on the lens but
compared to a 35 mm camera, the value is roughly one aperture
setting lower (the focused range becomes narrower).
• The wider the wide-angle lens, and the farther away the subject,
the deeper the depth of field is (some zoom lenses do not have ascale for depth of field because of their designs).

Shooting Functions

Aperture and Depth of Field

90

Setting the Sensitivity
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.
The sensitivity can be set to [AUTO] or within a sensitivity range equivalent
to ISO 100 to 3200. The default setting is [AUTO].

1

Turn the rear e-dial (S) whilepressing the o button in
Capture mode.
The sensitivity displayed on the status
screen and LCD panel and in the
viewfinder changes.
Press the | (Green) button while pressing
the o button to return to [AUTO].

4
Shooting Functions

2

Take your finger off the o button and rear e-dial (S).
The sensitivity is set.
• To set the sensitivity, you can also press the o button once and take yourfinger off the button, and then turn the rear e-dial (S) to change thesensitivity. In this case, press the o button again or turn off the exposure
metering timer (p.114) to set the sensitivity.
• When the exposure mode is set to B (Green), L (Shutter & Aperture
Priority) or C (Movie), the sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO] and the setting
cannot be changed.
• When the exposure mode is set to p (Bulb), the upper sensitivity limit is ISO
1600.
• When the exposure mode is set to K (Sensitivity Priority), a (Hyper-manual),p (Bulb) or M (Flash X-sync Speed), the sensitivity cannot be set to [AUTO].
• The sensitivity range can be expanded to a range of ISO 100 to 6400 when [3.
Expanded Sensitivity] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.85) is set to [On].
• Captured images can show more noise if a higher sensitivity is set. You canreduce image noise by setting [19. High-ISO Noise Reduction] in the[A Custom Setting 3] menu. (p.92)• You can set whether to lock the sensitivity adjustment to increments of 1 EV
or to coordinate it with the EV Steps (p.116) in [2. Sensitivity Steps] in the [ACustom Setting 1] menu (p.85).

Setting the Range of Automatic Sensitivity Correction
Set the range in which the sensitivity is automatically adjusted when thesensitivity is set to [AUTO]. The sensitivity is automatically corrected in therange of [ISO 100-800] by default.

1

91
Select [ISO AUTO Setting] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [ISO AUTO Setting] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to set the minimum
sensitivity.

ISO AUTO Setting
ISOAUTO

100 -

800

AUTO ISO Parameters

MENU

3

4

ISO AUTO Setting
ISOAUTO

100 -

800

AUTO ISO Parameters

MENU Cancel

4
5
6

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AUTO ISO
Parameters].
Use the four-way controller (45)to select the parameter.
u: Increases the sensitivity as little
as possible
s: Standard (Default setting)a: Actively increases the sensitivity

ISO AUTO Setting
ISOAUTO

100 -

800

AUTO ISO Parameters

MENU

7

Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
When [Highlight Correction] is set to O (On) in [D-Range Setting] in the[A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.199), the minimum sensitivity is ISO 200.

Shooting Functions

Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to set the maximum
sensitivity.

92
Expanding the Dynamic Range
Dynamic range is the ratio that indicates the light level expressed by the
CMOS sensor pixels from bright areas to dark areas. The larger it is, thebetter the whole range from dark to bright areas will appear in the picture.
By expanding the dynamic range, you can expand the light level
expressed by the CMOS sensor pixels, making it more difficult for an
overexposed area to occur in the image.
To expand the dynamic range, use [D-Range Setting] in the [A Rec.
Mode 1] menu. (p.199)

Noise Reduction
4
Shooting Functions

When you use a digital camera to shoot with a long exposure or highsensitivity setting, image noise (image roughness or unevenness)becomes noticeable.
You can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. Images shotwith Noise Reduction take longer to save.
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Reduces noise during long exposures.
Set in [18. Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu
(p.86).
On

The camera determines the conditions such as the shutter speed,
sensitivity, and internal temperature, and automatically reduces
noise as necessary.

Off

Reduces noise only when the exposure mode is set to p and the
shutter remains open for more than 30 seconds.

High-ISO Noise Reduction
Reduces noise at high sensitivity (ISO) settings.
Select [Off], [Low], [Medium], or [High] for [19. High-ISO Noise
Reduction] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.86). You can change
the sensitivity at which to activate Noise Reduction in [20. High-ISO
NR Start Level] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.86).

93

Changing the Exposure Mode
This camera features the following nine exposure modes. Use the mode
dial to change the exposure mode. (p.39)
The settings available for each exposure mode are as follows.
Exposure
Mode

Characteristics

EV Compensation

ChangeShutter
Speed

ChangeAperture

ChangeSensitivity

Page

B(Green)Lets you capture
images with fully
automatic settings.

×

×

×

×

p.95

Automatically sets
shutter speed andaperture to the proper
exposure according
to Program Line whene (Hypertaking pictures. You
program)can use the front andrear e-dials to switch
between shutter
priority and aperturepriority.

z

z

z

z

p.96

Automatically sets theK
shutter speed and(Sensitivity aperture to the proper
Priority)
exposure according
to the set sensitivity.

z

×

×

Other
than
AUTO

p.98

b
(ShutterPriority)

Lets you set thedesired shutter speed
for expressing
moving subjects.

z

z

×

z

p.100

c
(Aperture
Priority)

Lets you set theaperture forcontrolling the depthof field.

z

×

z

z

p.102

Automatically sets thesensitivity so that theLmanually set shutter(Shutter & speed and aperture
Aperture
will give the proper
Priority)
exposure according
to the brightness ofthe subject.

z

z

z

AUTO
only

p.104

4
Shooting Functions

94
Exposure
Mode

Characteristics

Lets you set the
shutter speed anda (Hyperaperture to capture
manual)the picture withcreative intent.

ChangeShutter
Speed

ChangeAperture

ChangeSensitivity

Page

z

z

z

z

p.107

p.110

p.112

p (Bulb)

Lets you capture
images that require
slow shutter speeds
such as fireworks andnight scenes.

×

×

z

Other
than
AUTO
(up toISO
1600)

M (FlashX-syncSpeed)The shutter speed islocked at 1/180
seconds. Use thiswhen using an
external flash that
does notautomatically set thesync speed.

z

×

z

Other
than
AUTO

4
Shooting Functions

EV Compensation

Program LineIn [Program Line] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu, you can choose fromthe following Program Lines including [AUTO]. When [1. Program
Line] is selected for the | (Green) button setting in L/a mode
(p.106) or in e/K mode, exposure is regulated according to the set
Program Line.
Settings

Characteristics

j AUTO

Camera determines the appropriate settings.

k NormalBasic Program Automatic Exposure. (default setting)lHi-speed
Priority

Program Automatic Exposure that prioritizes highshutter speeds.

m

DOF Priority Program Automatic Exposure that closes the aperture(deep)
as much as possible for a deep depth of field.

n

DOF Priority Program Automatic Exposure that opens the aperture(shallow)
as much as possible for a shallow depth of field.

Program Automatic Exposure that prioritizes the besto MTF Priority aperture settings for the attached lens when a DA, DA
L, D FA, FA J or FA lens is used.

95
Using a Lens with an Aperture Ring
When using a lens with an aperturering, set the aperture to the s (AUTO)
position while holding down the autolock button on the lens.

Using the B (Green) Mode1

Set the mode dial to B.

4
Shooting Functions

Lets you capture images with fully automatic settings.
In B mode, pictures are taken with the following settings.
• Program Linej (AUTO)• File Format
JPEG• JPEG Recorded Pixels
W• JPEG Quality
C• Sensitivity
AUTO• Metering Method
L (Multi-segment Metering)• AF Point
S (Auto)• White Balance
F (Auto)• Custom Image
Bright• Shake Reductionk (On)• Color Space
sRGB

96
• In B mode, the following functions are not available.
- Shutter Speed- Aperture- EV Compensation- Flash (Flash On, Slow-speed
Sync, Exposure Compensation)- Continuous Shooting- Focus Mode k (available
when l is selected)- D-Range setting- Lens Correction- Exposure Bracketing- Mirror Lock-up Shooting- Multi-exposure- Interval Shooting- Extended Bracketing- Digital Filter- HDR Capture- Horizon Correction- Save as A
- L and | button operations- Custom menu settings (available
when all settings are default values)• The control panel cannot be displayed in B mode.

4
Shooting Functions

Using the e (Hyper-program) Mode
Automatically sets shutter speed and aperture to the proper exposure
according to Program Line when taking pictures.
Use the front and rear e-dials to change the shutter speed and aperture
while maintaining the proper exposure (p.97).

1

Set the mode dial to e.

2

97
Confirm the shutter speed and aperture.
Confirm using the status screen, viewfinder or LCD panel.

P

AF.S

1/ 125
ISO

AUTO

F 5.6

100

-5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 +5

AWB
JPEG 14M[

37]

e-dial in Program
You can set the action for the front and rear e-dials in e mode with[22. e-dial in Program] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu (p.86), andyou can change the shutter speed and aperture while maintaining theproper exposure.
Settings
Front e-dial (R)1b (Shutter Speed)

Rear e-dial (S)c (Aperture)2c (Aperture)b (Shutter Speed)

3
4

EV Compensation
P.SHIFT (Program Shift)

P.SHIFT (Program Shift)
EV Compensation

5– (Not Available)– (Not Available)• You can only set the shutter speed or aperture to a value that will
give a correct exposure with the relative aperture or shutter speed
range of the lens being used. If the brightness changes and the
shutter speed or aperture is outside the relative range, the shutter
speed or aperture will blink on the status screen and LCD panel
and in the viewfinder.
• Pressing the | (Green) button returns to Automatic Exposure.

4
Shooting Functions• Set the Program Line to use in [Program Line] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
(p.94).
• Set the EV compensation in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure
steps in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.116)• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed
and aperture when the sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO] (p.90).

98
Using the K (Sensitivity Priority) Mode
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the subject.
The shutter speed and aperture are automatically set according to theselected sensitivity to obtain the appropriate exposure.

1

4
Shooting Functions

2

Set the mode dial to K.

Turn the rear e-dial (S) toadjust the sensitivity.

The shutter speed, aperture value and sensitivity are displayed on thestatus screen and LCD panel and in the viewfinder.

Sv

AF.S

1/ 30
ISO

F 4.5

100

-5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 +5

AWB
JPEG 14M

[

37]

99
• You can set the sensitivity to values equivalent to ISO 100 to 3200. [AUTO]
is not available.
• In K mode, you cannot change the sensitivity by turning the rear e-dial(S) while pressing the o button.
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.115)• Set the sensitivity in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure steps in[1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.116)

e-dial in K mode
You can set the functions of the front and rear e-dials in K mode.
Set in [23. e-dial in Sv mode] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu
(p.86).
Rear e-dial (S)Sensitivity

2
3

P.SHIFT (Program Shift)Sensitivity

Sensitivity
P.SHIFT (Program Shift)45

EV Compensation
Sensitivity

Sensitivity
EV Compensation4
Shooting Functions

Settings
Front e-dial (R)1– (Not Available)

100
Using the b (Shutter Priority) Mode
Lets you set the desired shutter speed for expressing moving subjects.
When taking pictures of a fast moving subject, you can increase the
shutter speed to make the subject look still or decrease the shutter speed
to have the subject show movement.
Aperture value is automatically set to give the appropriate exposure
depending on the shutter speed.
1 Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.88)

1

Set the mode dial to b.

4
Shooting Functions

2

Turn the front e-dial (R) to
adjust the shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within therange of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.

The shutter speed and aperture value are displayed on the status screen
and LCD panel and in the viewfinder.

Tv

AF.S

1/ 125
ISO

AUTO

F 5.6

400

-5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 +5

AWB
JPEG 14M

[

37]

101
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.115)• Set the shutter speed in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure
steps in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.116)• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed
when the sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO] (p.90).

Exposure Warning

e-dial in b mode
You can set the functions of the front and rear e-dials in b mode. Set
in [24. e-dial in Tv mode] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu (p.86).
Settings

Front e-dial (R)Rear e-dial (S)12b (Shutter Speed)b (Shutter Speed)– (Not Available)
EV Compensation

3
4

EV Compensationb (Shutter Speed)b (Shutter Speed)
Sensitivity

5

Sensitivityb (Shutter Speed)4
Shooting Functions

If the subject is too bright or too dark,
the aperture value will blink on thestatus screen and LCD panel and in the
viewfinder. If the subject is too bright,
choose a faster shutter speed. If it is too dark, choose a slower shutter
speed. When the aperture value indication stops blinking, you cantake the picture with proper exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.

102
Using the c (Aperture Priority) Mode
Lets you set the desired aperture for controlling the depth of field. The
depth of field is deeper and the front and back of the focused object is clear
when aperture is set to a large value. The depth of field is shallower andthe front and back of the focused object is blurred when aperture is set toa small value.
Shutter speed is automatically set to appropriate exposure depending on
the aperture value.
1 Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.88)

1

Set the mode dial to c.

4
Shooting Functions

2

Turn the rear e-dial (S) toadjust the aperture.
Aperture range depends on the lens inuse.

The shutter speed and aperture value are displayed on the status screen
and LCD panel and in the viewfinder.

Av

AF.S

1/ 30
ISO

AUTO

F 4.5

400

-5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 +5

AWB
JPEG 14M

[

37]

103
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.115)• Set the aperture value in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure
steps in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.116)• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected aperture when
the sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO] (p.90).

Exposure Warning

e-dial in c Mode
You can set the functions of the front and rear e-dials in c mode. Set
in [25. e-dial in Av mode] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu (p.86).
Settings

Front e-dial (R)Rear e-dial (S)12– (Not Available)
EV Compensationc (Aperture)c (Aperture)34c (Aperture)
Sensitivity

EV Compensationc (Aperture)5c (Aperture)

Sensitivity

4
Shooting Functions

If the subject is too bright or too dark,
the shutter speed will blink on the status
screen and LCD panel and in the
viewfinder. When the subject is toobright, set the aperture smaller (larger number), and when too dark,
open the aperture further (smaller number). Once blinking stops, you
can take a picture with proper exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.

104
Using the L (Shutter & Aperture Priority) Mode
You can set both the desired shutter speed and aperture to take thepicture.
Automatically sets the sensitivity so that the manually set shutter speed
and aperture will give the proper exposure according to the brightness ofthe subject.

1

Set the mode dial to L.

4
Shooting Functions

2

Turn the front e-dial (R) to
adjust the shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within therange of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.

3

Turn the rear e-dial (S) toadjust the aperture.
Aperture range depends on the lens inuse.

The shutter speed and aperture value are displayed on the status screen
and LCD panel and in the viewfinder.

TAv

AF.S

1/ 1000
ISO

AUTO

105

F 4.5

100

-5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 +5

AWB
JPEG 14M[

37]

Exposure Warning
If the subject is too bright or too dark, thesensitivity will blink on the status screen
and LCD panel and in the viewfinder. In
this sort of situation, change the shutter speed and aperture. Whenthe indication stops blinking, you can take the picture with proper
exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.

4
Shooting Functions• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.115)• Set the shutter speed and aperture values in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV.
Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
(p.116)• In L mode, the sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].

106
e-dial in L & a Modes
You can set the functions of the front and rear e-dials in L and amodes. Set in [26. e-dial in TAv & M modes] in the [A Custom
Setting 4] menu (p.86).
Settings
Front e-dial (R)1b (Shutter Speed)2c (Aperture)

Rear e-dial (S)c (Aperture)b (Shutter Speed)

Green Button in L & a
4
Shooting Functions

The aperture and shutter speed are automatically adjusted to theappropriate exposure at the moment the | (Green) button is pressedin L and a modes. You can select an exposure adjustment
method in [28. Green Button in TAv & M] in the [A Custom Setting 4]
menu (p.86).
1

Program LineThe aperture and shutter speed are adjusted
automatically according to Program Line (p.94).

2b Shift

The aperture is locked and the shutter speed isadjusted automatically.

3c Shift

The shutter speed is locked and the aperture isadjusted automatically.

4

Off

Disables Green button operation.

• Shutter speed is adjusted to appropriate exposure according tolens aperture when lens aperture is not set to the s (Auto) position.

107
Using a (Hyper-manual) Mode
You can set the shutter speed and aperture value. This mode is suitableto take pictures of your choice by combining them. This mode isconvenient for taking pictures using the same combination of the shutter
speed and aperture settings or taking intentionally underexposed (darker)
or overexposed (brighter) photographs.
1 Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.88)

1

Set the mode dial to a.

4

Press the | (Green) button.
Automatically switches shutter speed andaperture to the proper exposure.

3

Turn the front e-dial (R) to
adjust the shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within therange of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.

Shooting Functions

2

108

4

Turn the rear e-dial (S) toadjust the aperture.
Aperture range depends on the lens inuse.

The shutter speed and aperture value aredisplayed on the status screen and LCD
panel and in the viewfinder.

M

AF.S

1/ 125
ISO

4

F 5.6

100

-5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

Shooting Functions

JPEG 14M

While adjusting the shutter speed or
aperture value, the difference from theappropriate exposure (EV value) isdisplayed in a bar graph. The appropriate
exposure is achieved when the indicatoris displayed in the center of the bar graph.

[37]

Difference from theappropriate exposure• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the exposure mode is set to amode, the sensitivity is the lowest sensitivity set in “Setting the Range ofAutomatic Sensitivity Correction” (p.90).
• Set the shutter speed and aperture values in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV.
Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
(p.116)

109
EV Bar
The EV bar appears on the LCD panel
and viewfinder in a mode. The
appropriate exposure is set when V is in
EV barthe middle of the EV bar. If it is towards-, it is underexposed. If it is towards +, it
is overexposed. If the value exceeds the range of the EV bar (±5.0),
the “+” or “-” blinks.

Exposure Warning

Combining with L
Press the L button (p.116) to record the exposure value inHyper-manual. If the shutter speed or aperture is then changed, thecombination of shutter speed and aperture changes while theexposure value is retained.
Example:If the shutter speed is 1/125 seconds and aperture is F5.6 and isrecorded by pressing the L button, and the shutter speed ischanged to 1/30 seconds with the front e-dial (R), the aperture
automatically changes to F11.

4
Shooting Functions

If the subject is too bright or too dark, “+”or “-” in the EV bar will blink in the
viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

110
Using the p (Bulb) Mode
This setting is useful for the long exposures required for shooting night
scenes and fireworks.

1

Set the mode dial to p.

4
Shooting Functions

B

AF.S

F 5.6

Bulb
ISO

100

-5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 +5

AWB
JPEG 14M

2

[

37]

Press the shutter release button.
The shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button is keptpressed.
EV Compensation, Continuous Shooting and Exposure Bracketing are notavailable in p mode.

111• Set the aperture value in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure
steps in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.116)• The Shake Reduction function is automatically disabled when the exposure
mode is set to p mode.
• Use a sturdy tripod and the cable switch CS-205 (optional) or Remote Control
F (optional) to prevent camera shake when using p mode. Connect the cableswitch to the cable release terminal (p.17).
• To operate the shutter release button of the remote control, set in [17.
Remote Control in Bulb] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.86).
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the exposure mode is set to pmode, the sensitivity is the lowest sensitivity set in “Setting the Range ofAutomatic Sensitivity Correction” (p.90).
• When the exposure mode is set to p, the upper sensitivity limit is ISO 1600.
• There is no limit on exposure time for Bulb shooting. However, werecommend using the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when shooting witha long exposure setting as the battery is used while the shutter remains open.
(p.47)

You can set the functions of the front and rear e-dials in p and M
modes. Set in [27. e-dial in B & X modes] in the [A Custom Setting 4]
menu (p.86).
Settings

Front e-dial (R)Rear e-dial (S)12– (Not Available)c (Aperture)c (Aperture)– (Not Available)

3
4

Sensitivityc (Aperture)c (Aperture)
Sensitivity

Shooting Functions

e-dial in p & M modes

4

112
Using the M (Flash X-Sync Speed) Mode
The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 seconds. Use this when using an
external flash that does not automatically set the sync speed.

1

4

Set the mode dial to M.

X

AF.S

Shooting Functions

1/ 180
ISO

F 5.6

100

-5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 +5

AWB
JPEG 14M[

37]• Turn the rear e-dial (S) to adjust the aperture value.
• Press the | (Green) button to retain the shutter speed at 1/180 seconds andautomatically adjust the aperture.
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the exposure mode is set to M
mode, the sensitivity is the lowest sensitivity set in “Setting the Range ofAutomatic Correction in AUTO” (p.90).

113

Selecting the Metering Method
Choose the part of the screen to use for measuring brightness anddetermining exposure. The following three methods can be selected. The
factory default setting is L (Multi-segment metering).

L Multi-segment

Segments the viewfinder in 77 parts, meters eachportion and determines the appropriate exposure.

M Center-weighted

Measures the entire viewfinder with an emphasis on
the center and determines the exposure.

N Spot Metering

Measures only the center of the viewfinder anddetermines exposure.

1

The set metering method is displayed in
the viewfinder and status screen.

Using the Multi-Segment Metering
The scene in the viewfinder is metered in 77
different zones as shown in the illustration
when using the multi-segment metering.
Even in backlit locations, this mode
automatically determines what level ofbrightness is in which portion andautomatically adjusts exposure.
The center-weighted metering mode is automatically set even if you select themulti-segment metering mode when using a lens other than a DA, DA L, D FA,
FA J, FA, F or A lens, or when lens aperture ring is set to other than s (Auto).
(Can only be used if [37. Using Aperture Ring] (p.294) in the [A Custom Setting
6] menu is set to [Permitted].)4
Shooting Functions

Turn the metering modeswitching lever.

114
Linking AE to AF Point during Multi-Segment
Metering
In [6. Link AE to AF Point] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.85),
you can link the exposure and AF point in the focusing area duringmulti-segment metering.
1

Off

Exposure is set separately from AF point. (default setting)2

On

Exposure is set in accordance with AF point.

Using the Center-Weighted Metering
4
Shooting Functions

Metering is weighted at the center of thescreen. Use this metering when you want tocompensate the exposure by experience,
instead of leaving it to the camera. The
illustration shows that sensitivity increases
as the pattern height increases (center). Thismode does not automatically compensate
for backlit scenes.

Using the Spot MeteringWith spot metering, brightness is measured
only within a limited area at the center of thescreen as shown in the illustration. You can
use this in combination with the AE lock(p.116) when the subject is extremely small
and the proper exposure is difficult to obtain.

Setting the Meter Operating TimeYou can set the exposure metering time to [10sec.] (default setting),[3sec.] or [30sec.] in [4. Meter Operating Time] in the [A Custom
Setting 1] menu (p.85).

115

Adjusting the ExposureThis allows you to deliberately overexpose (brighten) or under-expose(darken) your picture.
Select 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
You can adjust the EV compensation from –5 to +5 (EV).

1Turn the rear e-dial (S) whilepressing the m button.
The exposure is adjusted.

4

Compensation value

EV compensation is not available when the exposure mode is set to B
(Green) or p (Bulb) mode.
• To set the EV compensation, you can also press the m button once and takeyour finger off the button, and then turn the rear e-dial (S) to change the
EV compensation. In this case, press the m button again or turn off the
exposure metering timer (p.114) to set the EV compensation.
• The EV compensation is not canceled by turning the camera off or by setting
any other exposure mode.

Shooting Functions

m is displayed on the LCD panel and in
the viewfinder during compensation.
Press the m button to confirm thecompensation value.
The EV compensation value is reset
to 0.0 when the | (Green) button ispressed while holding down the mbutton.

116
EV Compensation for a and M modes
For example, if the EV compensation value is set to +1.5 for a(Hyper-manual) and M (Flash X-sync speed) modes, anunderexposure of 1.5 EV is displayed on the EV bar. If you set the
exposure value so that the V is displayed at the center of the EV bar,
the image will be captured with the compensated value.

4

Changing the Exposure Steps

Shooting Functions

Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] in the[A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.85) toincrements of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV.

1. EV Steps
1 1/3 EV Steps
2 1/2 EV Steps

Exposure compensation steps
now set to 1/3 EV

Step interval

Exposure setting value

1/3 EV±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0, ±3.3, ±3.7,±4.0, ±4.3, ±4.7, ±5.0

1/2 EV

±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0, ±3.5, ±4.0, ±4.5, ±5.0

Locking the Exposure Before Shooting (AE Lock)AE lock is a function that locks the exposure prior to taking the picture. Use
this when the subject is too small or backlit and a proper exposure setting
cannot be obtained.

1

117
Press the L button.
The camera locks the exposure(brightness) at that instant.
@ is displayed in the status screen andviewfinder while the AE lock is engaged.
(p.23, p.31)
Press it again to unlock.

Shooting While the Exposure is Automatically
ChangedAuto Bracket is a function for continuously shooting images with theexposure automatically adjusted for underexposure andoverexposure. Each time the shutter release button is pressed, 3 or
5 shots are taken. Refer to “Shooting while Adjusting the Settings(Auto Bracket)” (p.148).

4
Shooting Functions• The exposure remains locked as long as the L button is kept pressed or
the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway. The exposure remains inmemory for a period between 0.5× to 2× the metering timer (p.114) even after
taking your finger off the L button.
• You will hear a beep when the L button is pressed. The beep can beturned off. (p.257)• AE lock is not available in B (Green), p (Bulb) or M (Flash X-sync Speed)mode.
• When any of the following operations are performed, AE lock is canceled.
- The L button is pressed again- The Q button, 3 button or M button is pressed- The mode dial is turned- The lens is changed- The lens with an aperture s (Auto) position is set to other than the sposition• The combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes depending on
the zooming position even while the AE lock is engaged when using a zoom
lens for which the maximum aperture varies depending on the focal length.
However, the exposure value does not change and the picture is taken at thebrightness level set by the AE lock.
• Exposure can be locked when the focus is locked. Set in [5. AE-L with AF
Locked] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.126)

Focusing118

You can focus with the following methods.
= Autofocus

The camera automatically focuses on the subject when
the shutter release button is pressed halfway.

\ Manual focus

Manually adjust the focus.

Using the Autofocus
4
Shooting Functions

You can also choose the autofocus mode from l (Single mode) where
the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on the subject andthe focus is locked at that position, and k (Continuous mode) where
the subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the shutter
release button is pressed halfway. The factory default setting is l.

1

Turn the focus mode lever to l
or A.

119
When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus
on the subject, the focus is locked at that position.

l(Single
mode)

k

2

The subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while
the shutter release button is pressed halfway. Even if thesubject is not in focus, the shutter can be released when the
shutter release button is pressed fully.
• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus,
the camera automatically tracks the subject if it is determined
to be a moving object. The lens will automatically operate andcontinuously focus on the subject.

Look through the viewfinderand press the shutter releasebutton halfway.

The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder and you will hear a beep
when the subject comes into focus.
(When blinking, the subject is not in
focus.)
1 Subjects that are Difficult to Focus
on (p.70)
Focus Indicator4
Shooting Functions(Continuousmode)• The focus is locked while ] is lit. To focus on anothersubject, take your finger off the shutter release button first.
• The shutter cannot be released until the subject is in focus. If
the subject is too close to the camera, move back and takethe picture. Adjust the focus manually if it is difficult to focus
on the subject (p.70). (p.126)• Press the shutter release button halfway. The AF assist lightwill flash automatically, making it easier to focus on thesubject if the subject is in a dark area. (Effective range: up to
5 m)

120
Using the = Button to Focus on the Subject
You can set the camera so that the focusing is performed when the =button is pressed.

1

Select [Enable AF] in [13. AF
Button Function] in the[A Custom Setting 2] menu.

13. AF Button Function
1 Enable AF
2 Cancel AF

AF is performed whenthe AF button is pressed

4
Shooting Functions

2

Enable AF

Auto focusing is performed by using the = button or the
shutter release button. (default setting)Cancel AF\ appears in the viewfinder while the = button ispressed. Autofocus does not activate when the shutter
release button is pressed. (Take your finger off the =button to return to normal autofocus mode.)

Press the = button.
Auto focusing is performed.

3l (Single mode)

When the subject is focused by pressing
the = button, the focus lock is activatedwhile the button is pressed.

k (Continuous mode)

The subject is kept in focus when the =button is pressed.

Press the shutter release button.
The picture is taken.

121

AF Adjustment
You can adjust the AF focusing position.
• Be sure to use [AF Adjustment] only when necessary. Care should betaken as adjusting the autofocus may make it difficult to capture
images with the appropriate focus.
• Any camera shake during test shooting may make it difficult to obtain theaccurate focusing position. Therefore, always use a tripod when taking test
shots.

1

4

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [On] and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [AF Adjustment] screen appears.

3

4

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Apply All] or[Apply One].
Apply All

Applies the same adjustment value to all lenses.

Apply One

This item will appear on the display only when the lens ID is
obtained. Saves and applies an adjustment value for eachlens type. (Up to 20 lens types)

Press the four-way controller (5)and adjust the value with the reare-dial (S) or the four-way
controller (45).

36. AF Adjustment
Apply All

+10

Apply One

Unset

Reset
MENU Cancel

OK OK

Available operations
Four-way controller (5) orrear e-dial (S) to the right (y)Adjusts the focus to a closer position.

Four-way controller (4) orrear e-dial (S) to the left (f)Adjusts the focus to a farther position.

| (Green) button

Resets the adjustment value to ±0.

Shooting Functions

2

Select [36. AF Adjustment] in the [A Custom Setting 6]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).

122

5

Press the 4 button.
The adjustment value is saved.

6

Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to the Capture mode.

7

Take a test picture.
You can easily check the focusing position by enlarging the image during
Live View (p.156) or Digital Preview (p.131).

4• Even when an adjustment value has been saved using [Apply One], if youpress the 4 button with [Apply All] selected in Step 3, the [Apply All] value
is used instead of the [Apply One] value.
• To reset a saved adjustment value, select [Reset] in Step 3.

Shooting Functions

Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)
Choose the part of the viewfinder to set focus to. The factory default
setting is S (Auto).
The selected AF point lights red in the viewfinder (Superimpose AF Area).
U Center

Sets the focusing area to the center of the viewfinder.

jSelect

Sets the focusing area to one of the eleven points in the AF area.

S AutoThe camera selects the optimum AF point even if the subject is
not centered.

Set with the AF point switching dial.

• AF point is not displayed in the viewfinder when [Off] is selected for [15.
Superimpose AF Area] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.86).
• The AF point is fixed to U regardless of this setting when using lenses otherthan DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens. (p.292)

123
Setting the Focus Position in the Viewfinder

1

2

Look through the viewfinder and check the position of thesubject.
Press the 4 button.
V appears in the viewfinder and the AF
point can be changed.

4

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select the desired
AF point.

The AF point lights red in the viewfinder(Superimpose AF Area) and you cancheck where you set the AF point.

4
Shooting Functions

3

Set the AF point switching dial toj.

124• The position of the changed AF point is stored even if the camera is turned
off or the focusing area is switched to U or S.
• When any of the following operations are performed, changing of the AF
point (in Step 3) is canceled.
- The main switch is turned off- The mode dial is turned- The AF point switching dial is turned- The 4 button, Q button, 3 button, M button or U button ispressedFixing the Focus (Focus Lock)
4
Shooting Functions

If the subject is outside the range of the focusing area, the camera cannot
automatically focus on the subject. In this situation, you can aim thefocusing area toward the subject, use the focus lock and recompose thepicture.

1
2Turn the focus mode lever to l.
Frame the desired composition
for your picture in the viewfinder.

Example:The person is out of focus
and the background is
focused instead.

3

125Center the subject to focus in the
viewfinder and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder and you will hear a beep when
the subject comes into focus. (Whenblinking, the subject is not in focus.)

4

Lock the focus.
Keep the shutter release button pressed halfway. The focus will remain
locked.

5• The focus is locked while the focus indicator ] is displayed.
• Turning the zoom ring with the focus locked may cause the subject to be outof focus.
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.257)

4
Shooting Functions

Recompose the picture while
keeping the shutter releasebutton pressed halfway.

126
Locking Exposure when Focus is Locked
Set [5. AE-L with AF Locked] in the[A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.85) to lock the
exposure value while the focus is locked.

5. AE-L with AF Locked
1 Off
2 On

AE is locked
when the focus
is locked

1

Off

Exposure is not locked when the focus is locked. (default setting)2

On

Exposure is locked when the focus is locked.

4
Shooting Functions

Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)
When you adjust the focus manually, you can use either the focus
indicator or the matte field in the viewfinder.

Using the Focus Indicator
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when the subject is in
focus even during manual focus.
You can manually adjust the focus using the focus indicator ].

1Turn the focus mode lever to \.

2

127
Look through the viewfinder,press the shutter release button
halfway and turn the focusing
ring.

The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder and you will hear a beep when
the subject comes into focus.

4• Adjust the focus manually using the matte field in the viewfinder when thesubject is difficult to focus (p.70) and the focus indicator will not stay lit.
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.257)

Using the Viewfinder Matte Field
You can manually adjust the focus using the matte field in viewfinder.

1

Turn the focus mode lever to \.

Shooting Functions

Focus Indicator

128

2

Look through the viewfinder andturn the focusing ring until thesubject is clearly visible on thefocusing screen.

Shooting in Catch-in Focus Mode4
Shooting Functions

When [35. Catch-in Focus] in the [A Custom Setting 5] menu (p.87)
is set to [On], if the focus mode is set to l and one of the following
types of lenses is attached, catch-in focus shooting is available andthe shutter is released automatically when the subject comes into
focus.
• Manual focus lens
• DA or FA lens that has a =/\ switching on the lens (the setting
on the lens must be set to \ before shooting)
How to Take Pictures
1 Attach a proper lens to the camera.
2 Turn the focus mode lever to l.
3 Set the focus on a position the subject will pass.
4 Press the shutter release button fully.
The shutter is released automatically when the subject comes
into focus in the set position.

Checking the Composition, Exposureand Focus Before Shooting (Preview)

129

You can use the preview function to check the depth of field, composition,
exposure and focus before taking a picture.
There are two preview methods.
Preview Method

Description

Optical Preview

For checking the depth of field with the viewfinder.

Digital Preview

For checking the composition, exposure and focus on themonitor.

You can also use the Live View function to display a real-time image on themonitor and change the shooting function settings during display and check thesettings by enlarging the image. Refer to p.156 for details.

Choose whether to use Optical Preview or Digital Preview when the main
switch is turned to the preview position (|).
The default setting is Optical Preview.

1

Select [Digital Preview] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [Digital Preview] screen appears.

2
3

Press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Off (Optical Preview)]
or [On].
Selecting [On] activates Digital Preview.

Digital Preview
Off (Optical Preview)
On
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area

MENU Cancel

4

Press the 4 button.

OK OK

Shooting Functions

Selecting the Preview Method

4

130

5
6

When [On] is selected in Step 2, use the four-way
controller (23) to select [Histogram] or [Bright/DarkArea], and use the four-way controller (45) to select O or
P.
Press the 3 button twice.
While setting Multi-exposure or shooting with Live View, or during intervalshooting, Optical Preview is used regardless of the setting.

Displaying the Optical Preview

4
Shooting Functions

1

2

Position the subject inside the AF
frame and press the shutter
release button halfway to focus
on the subject.

Turn the main switch to | whilelooking through the viewfinder.
You can check the depth of field in the
viewfinder while the main switch is set tothe position |.
During this time, no shooting information
is displayed in the viewfinder, and the
shutter cannot be released.

3

Take your finger off the main switch.
Optical Preview is ended and the camera is ready to take a picture.

131

Displaying the Digital Preview

1

Focus on the subject, thencompose the picture in the
viewfinder and turn the main
switch to |.

The icon (|) appears on the monitor
during preview and you can check thecomposition, exposure and focus.

4

Available operations
Rear e-dial (S)L button

2

Enlarges the preview image. (p.214)
Saves the preview image. Select [Save as]
and press the 4 button.

Press the shutter release button halfway.
Digital Preview is ended and the autofocus system operates.
The maximum display time for Digital Preview is 60 seconds.

Shooting Functions

AE.L

132

Preventing Camera Shake during
Shutter Release
Using the Shake Reduction Function

4
Shooting Functions

The Shake Reduction function reduces camera shake that occurs when
the shutter release button is pressed. This is useful for taking pictures insituations where camera shake is likely to occur. The Shake Reduction
function allows you to take pictures at approximately 4 steps slower
shutter speed without the risk of the camera shake.
The Shake Reduction function is ideal when taking pictures in the following
situations.
• When taking pictures in dimly lit locations, such as indoors, at night,
on cloudy days and in the shade• When taking telephoto pictures
Blurred picture

Picture taken with
the Shake Reduction function

The Shake Reduction function can be used to reduce horizontal andvertical camera shake or keep the image level.
• The Shake Reduction function does not compensate for blurring caused bysubject movement. To take pictures of a moving subject, increase the shutter
speed.
• The Shake Reduction function may not fully reduce camera shake when
taking close-up shots. In this case, it is recommended that the Shake
Reduction function be turned off and the camera be used with a tripod.
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work when shooting with a slower
shutter speed, for example when shooting a moving subject or night scenes.
In this case, it is recommended that the Shake Reduction function be turned
off and the camera be used with a tripod.

133
Reducing Vertical and Horizontal Camera Shake1
2

Select [Shake Reduction] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
Use the four-way controller (45)to select k or l.
k: Uses Shake Reduction. (default
setting)l: Does not use Shake Reduction.

3

1 2 3 4

Color SpaceRAW File Format
RAW Button
MemoryUSER
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
MENU Cancel

sRGB
PEF

OK OK

4

Press the 3 button.

4

Aim the camera at the subject and press the shutter
release button halfway.
k appears in the viewfinder and the
Shake Reduction function is activated.

Correcting the Tilt of the Images

1
2

3

Select [Horizon Correction] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu.
Use the four-way controller (45)to select O or P.

1 2 3 4

Movie
Live View
Status Screen
Digital Preview
Instant Review
Electronic Level
Horizon Correction
MENU Exit

Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Shooting Functions

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

134

4

Aim the camera at the subject and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The following indicators appear on the status screen.
q: Shake Reduction On + Horizon Correction On
r: Shake Reduction Off + Horizon Correction On

4
Shooting Functions• Set [Shake Reduction] to l (Off) when using the camera with a tripod orwhen this function is not needed.
• [Shake Reduction] is automatically set to l (Off) and cannot be selectedin the following situations.
- Self-timer shooting- Remote control shooting- Bulb shooting- HDR Capture- Mirror lock-up shooting- Wireless mode with an external flash• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work (for about 2 seconds) rightafter turning on the camera or restoring from Auto Power Off. Wait for the
Shake Reduction function to become stable before gently pressing the shutter
release button to take a picture. When you press the shutter release button
halfway and if k appears in the viewfinder, the camera is ready to take apicture.
• The Shake Reduction function is available with any Q compatible
PENTAX lens. However, when the aperture ring is set to other than the s(Auto) position or a lens without an s position is used, the camera does notoperate unless [37. Using Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting 6] menu
is set to [Permitted]. Set this beforehand. However, in such cases somefunctions are restricted. Refer to “Notes on [37. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.294)
for details.

135
When the Focal Length Cannot Be Automatically Detected
The Shake Reduction function operates by obtaining the lens informationsuch as focal length.
If the camera uses a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens, the lensinformation is automatically obtained when the Shake Reduction functionis activated.
The [Input Focal Length] setting screen appears when the camera isturned on with [Shake Reduction] set to k (On) and a type of lens that
does not support automatic obtaining the lens information such as focal
length (p.292) is mounted.
Set the focal length manually in the [Input Focal Length] setting screen.

1

Use the four-way controller (45)or the rear e-dial (S) to set the
focal length.
Select from the following 34 focal length
values. (The default setting is [35].)
8

Input Focal Length

100

120

135

10 12 15 18 20 24 28 30 35

40 45 50 55 65 70 75 85 100 120

MENU Cancel

OK OK

135 150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
550 600 700 800• If the focal length for your lens is not listed above, select the value closest to
the actual focal length (example: [18] for 17 mm and [100] for 105 mm).
• When using a zoom lens, select the actual focal length at the zoom setting inthe same manner.

2

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.

4
Shooting Functions• The [Input Focal Length] setting screen does not appear when using a lensthat supports automatic obtaining the lens information such as focal length.
• When using a lens without the s position on the aperture or with the aperture
set to a position other than the s position, set [37. Using Aperture Ring] inthe [A Custom Setting 6] menu to [Permitted]. (p.294)

136• To change the focal length setting, use [Input Focal Length] in the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu (p.84).
• Effect of Shake Reduction is influenced by the shooting distance as well as
focal length information. The Shake Reduction function may not work as
effectively as expected when shooting at close ranges.

Shooting with the Self-timer
This camera has the following two types of self-timers.

4
Shooting Functions

gShutter will be released after about 12 seconds. Use this mode toinclude the photographer in the picture.

Z

A mirror pops up immediately after shutter release button is pressed.
Shutter is released after about 2 seconds. Use this mode to avoid
camera shake when the shutter release button is pressed.

1

Mount the camera onto a tripod.

2

Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (45)to select g.

Drive Mode
Single Frame Shooting

MUP

MENU Cancel

OK OK

4

137
Press the four-way controller (3)and use the four-way controller(45) to select g or Z.

Drive Mode
Self-Timer (12 sec.)

MUP
2s

MENU Cancel

5

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

6

Press the shutter release button
halfway.

7

Press the shutter release button
fully.
For g, the front and back self-timer lamps
start blinking slowly and blink rapidly 2
seconds before the shutter is released.
The beep is heard and the rate increases.
The shutter will be released about 12
seconds after the shutter release button
is pressed fully.
For Z, the shutter will be released about
2 seconds after the shutter release button
is pressed fully.

Shooting Functions

The autofocus system operates. The
focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.

4

138• You can set the camera so that the beep does not sound. (p.257)• Exposure may be affected if the light enters the viewfinder. Attach theprovided ME viewfinder cap or use the AE lock function (p.116). The lightentering the viewfinder has no effect on the exposure when the exposure
mode is set to a (Manual) (p.107).

4

Removing the Eyecup FR

Attaching the ME Viewfinder cap

Shooting Functions• Select a mode other than g or Z in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the
self-timer shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if[Drive Mode] in [Memory] (p.281) of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu is set to P(Off).
• [Shake Reduction] is automatically set to l (Off) when g or Z is set.

Shooting with the Remote Control (Optional)
The shutter can be released from a distance by using the optional remotecontrol unit. This camera has the following three types of remote control
shooting modes.
shutter will be released immediately after the shutterh Remote Control The
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
Control When the shutter release button on the remote control uniti Remote(3s delay)is pressed, the shutter is released after about 3 seconds.
Remotei Continuous
Shooting

Continuous shooting starts when the shutter releasebutton on the remote control unit is pressed. Press the
shutter release button on the remote control unit again toexit continuous shooting.

139

1

Mount the camera onto a tripod.

2

Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

Use the four-way controller (45) to select h.
4Press the four-way controller (3)and use the four-way controller(45) to select h, i, or i.
W appears on the LCD panel. The selftimer lamp will blink to let you know thatthe camera is in remote control waitstatus.

5

Drive Mode
Remote Control

MUP

MENU Cancel

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

6

Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.

Shooting Functions

3
4

140

4

7

Point the remote control unit
towards the remote control
receiver on the front or back of
the camera and press the shutter
release button on the remotecontrol.

Approx.
4m

The operating distance of the remotecontrol unit is approximately 4 m from thefront of the camera and approximately 2m from the back of the camera.
After the picture is taken, the self-timer
lamp lights for 2 seconds and then returns
to blinking.

Approx.
2m

Shooting Functions• You cannot focus with the remote control unit in default settings. Focus on
the subject first with the camera before operating with the remote control.
You can use the remote control to focus with [16. AF with Remote Control] inthe [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.86).
• Exposure may be affected if the light enters the viewfinder. Attach theprovided ME viewfinder cap or use the AE lock function (p.116). The lightentering the viewfinder has no effect on the exposure when the exposure
mode is set to a (Manual) (p.107).

Removing the Eyecup FR

Attaching the ME Viewfinder cap• Select a mode other than h, i or i in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel
the remote control shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera isturned off if [Drive Mode] in [Memory] (p.281) of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu
is set to P (Off).
• [Shake Reduction] is automatically set to l (Off) when h, i or i is set.
• The remote control shooting may not be available in backlit conditions.
• The remote control unit battery can send a remote control signal about
30,000 times. Contact PENTAX Service Center to replace the battery (thiswill involve a fee).

141

Shooting with the Mirror Lock-up Function
Use the Mirror Lock-up function if camera shake is evident even when the
remote control or cable switch is used with a tripod.
To use the Mirror Lock-up function, press the shutter release button toraise the mirror up. Press it again to release the shutter.
This camera has the following two types of the mirror lock-up shooting.
d Mirror lock-upeMirror lock-up shooting with the shutter release button.

Mirror lock-up shooting with the remote control. The
Mirror lock-up shutter will be released immediately after the shutter
remote control release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
(p.138)

4

Mount the camera onto a tripod.

2

Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.

Shooting Functions

1

The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

3
4

Use the four-way controller (45) to select d.
Press the four-way controller (3)and use the four-way controller(45) to select d or e.

Drive Mode
Mirror Lock-up Shooting

MUP

d appears on the LCD panel.

MUP

MENU Cancel

OK OK

142

5

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

6

Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.

7

Press the shutter release button fully.
The mirror pops up. AE lock function is enabled with the exposure value
set immediately before the mirror pops up.

8

Press the shutter release button fully again.

4

The shutter is released and the picture is taken.

Shooting Functions• The mirror automatically returns to its original position if 30 seconds elapse
after the mirror pops up when the shutter release button is pressed for the
first time (except while setting Multi-exposure).
• [Shake Reduction] is automatically set to l (Off) when d or e is set.
• Select a mode other than d or e in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel
the mirror lock-up shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera isturned off if [Drive Mode] in [Memory] (p.281) of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu
is set to P (Off).

Taking Pictures Continuously

143

Continuous Shooting
Pictures can be taken continuously while the shutter release button is held
down.
This camera has the following two types of continuous shooting.
Continuous
Shooting (Hi)When [JPEG Recorded Pixels] is set to W and [JPEG
Quality] is C, pictures are taken continuously atapproximately 5.2 frames per second. Up to 40 frames
can be shot in one sequence.

hContinuous
Shooting (Lo)When [JPEG Recorded Pixels] is set to W and [JPEG
Quality] is C, pictures are taken continuously atapproximately 3.3 frames per second. Pictures can betaken continuously until the SD Memory Card is full.

When the file format is [RAW], up to 15 frames (PEF) for g (Continuous
Shooting (Hi)) or up to 17 frames (PEF) for h (Continuous Shooting (Lo)) canbe taken continuously.

1

Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (45)to select g.

Drive Mode
Single Frame Shooting

MUP

MENU Cancel

3

Press the four-way controller (3)and use the four-way controller(45) to select g or h.

OK OK

Drive Mode
Continuous Shooting (Hi)MUP

MENU Cancel

OK OK

4
Shooting Functions

g

144

4

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take pictures continuously.

5

Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.

6

Press the shutter release button fully.
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter release button is fullypressed. Take your finger off the shutter release button to stop.
• If the focus mode is set to l (Single mode), the focus position is lockedon the first frame and pictures are taken continuously at the same interval.
• Focusing is continuously active during continuous shooting when the focus
mode is set to k (Continuous mode).
• You can also use the remote control for continuous shooting. (p.138)• The shutter cannot be released until charging is complete when using thebuilt-in flash. You can set the camera to enable shutter release while charging
the built-in flash in [30. Release While Charging] in the [A Custom Setting 5]
menu. (p.77)• Select a mode other than g or h in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel thecontinuous shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if[Drive Mode] in [Memory] (p.281) of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu is set to P(Off).
• The shooting speed may be slower when [Lens Correction] (p.201) is set toO (On).

4
Shooting Functions

Interval Shooting
During interval shooting, pictures are taken at a set interval from a set time.
Interval shooting is not available when the mode dial is set to A, B (Green),p (Bulb) or C (Movie), or when Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter or HDR
Capture is set.

1

Select [Interval Shooting] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Interval Shooting] screen appears.

2

145
Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Interval].
When taking two or more pictures, set the
wait time until the next picture is taken.
Use the four-way controller (45) toselect the number of hours, minutes, andseconds, and use the four-way controller(23) to set the time.
You can set up to 24 hours, 00 minutes,
and 00 seconds.

3

Interval Shooting
Start Shooting
00 : 00 ' 00 "Interval
Number of Shots

2 images

Start Interval

Now

Start TimeMENU Cancel

OK OK

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of
Shots].

4

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Interval].
Set the time when the first picture is taken.
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way controller (23)to select [Now] or [Set Time].

5

Now

Shooting starts immediately. You can take two or more pictures.

Set
Time

Shooting starts at the set time. Press the four-way controller (3) toselect [Start Time], use the four-way controller (45) to select thetime, and use the four-way controller (23) to set the start time.

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start
Shooting] and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a series of interval pictures.

6

Press the shutter release button
halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears when thesubject is in focus.

Interval ShootingStandbyRemaining Shots

10 images

Interval

00 : 00 ' 00 "MENU Exit

4
Shooting Functions

Set the number of shots to be taken.
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way controller (23)to select the number of shots to be taken.
You can select between 1 and 99 shots.

146

7

Press the shutter release button fully.
When [Start Interval] is set to [Now], the first picture is taken. When set
to [Set Time], shooting starts at the set time.
For shooting multiple pictures, pictures are taken at the interval set in Step 2.
After the set number of pictures is taken, the camera returns to normal
Capture mode.
• The camera cannot be operated during interval shooting. To cancel the intervalshooting, press any button on the back of the camera or press the shutter
release button and the 3 button to display the exit confirmation screen,
and then use the four-way controller (23) to select [Exit] and press the 4
button. You can also exit the interval shooting by turning the main switch off orturning the mode dial.
• When the interval shooting is set, Extended Bracketing and Multi-exposure are
not available.
• Interval shooting is not available when the exposure mode is set to p (Bulb)mode.
• 9 (Single Frame Shooting) is selected regardless of the current drive modesetting.
• If the subject is not in focus with the focus mode set to l (Single mode) or
if the [Interval] setting is too short and the previous image processing cannot becompleted before taking the next picture, no picture may be taken.
• Although each shot taken is displayed on the monitor with Instant Review, theycannot be enlarged or deleted.
• The [Interval] setting is disabled when [Number of Shots] is set to [1].
• Interval shooting is canceled when the SD Memory Card has no more available
space.
• If Auto Power Off function (p.270) turns the camera off during interval shooting,the camera automatically turns on again when the shooting time approaches.
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when using theinterval shooting over a long period of time. (p.47)

4
Shooting Functions

Multi-exposure
You can take multiple frames while creating a single picture.
Multi-exposure is not available when the mode dial is set to B (Green) or C
(Movie), or when Extended Bracketing, HDR Capture or Digital Filter is set.

1

Select [Multi-exposure] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [Multi-exposure] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of Shots].

3

147
Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to select the number ofshots.

Multi-exposure
Start Shooting
Number of Shots

2 times

Auto EV Adjustment

Select from 2 to 9 shots.
MENU Cancel

4
5

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto EV Adjustment]
and use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.

6

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start
Shooting] and press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the Capture mode.

7

Take a picture.
The created picture is displayed in Instant Review each time the shutter
release button is pressed. Press the i button during Instant Review to discard
pictures created up to that point and create again from the first picture.
The picture is saved when the set number of shots has been taken, andthen the [Multi-exposure] screen appears again.
• When Multi-exposure is set, Interval Shooting and Extended Bracketing are
not available.
• Multi-exposure, Exposure Bracketing and Extended Bracketing cannot be
used at the same time. The mode set last is used.
• [Lens Correction] setting (p.201) is disabled when Multi-exposure is set.
• If any of the following operations are performed while shooting, the picturesthat have been already taken are saved and Multi-exposure is exited.
- The Q button, 3 button, four-way controller (2345), M
button or | button is pressed- The mode dial is turned- Exposure Bracketing is set• When shooting in Multi-exposure mode using Live View, a semi-transparent
composite image of the pictures taken is displayed. (It is not displayed when
outputting to an external monitor.)4
Shooting Functions

When O (On) is set, the exposure is adjusted automatically according to
the number of shots.

Shooting while Adjusting theSettings (Auto Bracket)

148

Auto Bracket is a function for shooting while automatically changing thecamera settings. There are two Auto Bracket modes: Exposure Bracketingand Extended Bracketing.
You can set Auto Bracketing Order in [8. Auto Bracketing Order] in the [ACustom Setting 2] menu (p.85).
Auto Bracketing Order0 ´ – ´ +, – ´ 0 ´ +, + ´ 0 ´ –, 0 ´ + ´ –Shooting while the Exposure is Automatically
Changed (Exposure Bracketing)4
Shooting Functions

You can take (3 or 5) continuous pictures with different exposure when the
shutter release button is pressed. When taking 3 pictures, the first frame
is exposed with no compensation, the second frame is underexposed(negative compensation) and the third is overexposed (positivecompensation).

Normal exposure

1

Underexposure

Overexposure

Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (45)to select l.

Drive Mode
Exposure Bracketing

MUP-5 4 3 2 1

3image(s)MENU Cancel

1 2 3 4 +5

±0.5EV
OK OK

3

149
Press the four-way controller (3)and use the four-way controller(45) to select l, b, or c.

Drive Mode
Exposure Bracketing

MUP-5 4 3 2 1

3image(s)MENU Cancel±0.5EVOK OK

lShooting with the shutter release button.

b

Shooting with the self-timer. Self-timer operates according to theself-timer (p.136) setting.

cShooting with the remote control. Remote control operates
according to the remote control (p.138) setting. When set to i
(Remote Continuous Shooting), the shutter is released immediately.

Turn the front e-dial (R) to set the number of shots.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to set the EV compensation
value.
The following EV compensation values can be set according to the step
interval set in [1. EV Steps] (p.116) in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.

6

Step interval

Bracket value

1/3 EV±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0

1/2 EV

±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

7

Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder and EV compensation
value appears on the status screen and LCD panel and in the viewfinderwhen the subject is in focus.

4
Shooting Functions45

1 2 3 4 +5

150

8

Press the shutter release button fully.
Continue to press the shutter release button until the set number of shots
has been captured.
Three or five consecutive images will be taken according to the order set
in [8. Auto Bracketing Order] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu (p.85).

4
Shooting Functions• When the focus mode is set to l (Single mode), the focus is locked in thefirst frame position and used for subsequent continuous frames.
• Even if you take your finger off the shutter release button during Auto
Bracket, the Auto Bracket exposure setting will remain effective for twice asmuch time as the exposure metering timer (default setting is approximately
20 seconds) (p.114) and you can take a picture at the next compensation
value. In this case, auto focusing works for each frame. After about twice asmuch time as the exposure metering timer, the camera returns to settings fortaking the first picture.
• You can combine Auto Bracket with the built-in flash or external flash (P-TTL
auto only) to change only the flash output continuously. However, when using
an external flash, holding the shutter release button down to take threecontinuous frames may cause the second and third frames to be taken before
the flash is fully charged. Always take one frame at a time after confirmingthat charging is complete.
• Exposure Bracketing is not available when the exposure mode is set to p
(Bulb) mode.
• Exposure Bracketing and Multi-exposure cannot be used at the same time.
The mode set last is used.
• When [7. One-Push Bracketing] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.85) is
set to [On], even if the shutter release button is not continuously pressed
fully, all frames are automatically shot with one press of the shutter releasebutton.

Taking Only Overexposed or Underexposed Pictures
You can use Auto Bracket mode for only underexposure oroverexposure shots by combining the operation with EV
compensation (p.115). Auto Bracket is performed in both cases on
the basis of the specified EV compensation value. (Up to ±8 EV)

151

Shooting while Adjusting Other Settings(Extended Bracketing)
You can save pictures with three different White Balance, Saturation, Hue,
High/Low Key Adjustment, Contrast and Sharpness levels.
Unlike Exposure Bracketing, three pictures are saved each time the
shutter is released.

1

Select [Extended Bracketing] in the [A Rec. Mode 2]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Extended Bracketing] screen appears.

24
Extended Bracketing

Shooting Functions

Press the four-way controller(5).

OFF Off

Bracketing Amount

MENU

3

Use the four-way controller (23)to choose an item.

Extended Bracketing
OFF Off
WB

White Balance
Saturation
Hue
High/Low Key Adj
SContrast
Sharpness
MENU Cancel

4
5

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Bracketing
Amount] and press the four-way controller (5).

152

6

Use the four-way controller (23) to select the bracketing
amount.
For [White Balance], select from [BA±1] (default setting), [BA±2], [BA±3],[GM±1], [GM±2] or [GM±3].
For other settings, select from [±1] (default setting), [±2], [±3] or [±4].

78Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to the Capture mode.

9

Take the picture.

4

Three frames are saved.

Shooting Functions• When Extended Bracketing is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] andcannot be changed. You cannot use Extended Bracketing when the fileformat is set to [RAW].
• When Extended Bracketing is set, Interval Shooting and Multi-exposure are
not available.
• Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter and HDR Capture cannot be used at thesame time. The mode set last is used.
• Exposure Bracketing and Extended Bracketing can be used at the sametime.
• When [Image Tone] for Custom Image is set to [Monochrome], [Saturation]and [Hue] are not available.
• When [Fine Sharpness] is set for Custom Image, the sharpness of Extended
Bracketing operates as Fine Sharpness.
• When [Contrast] is set for Custom Image, the contrast of Extended
Bracketing operates according to the [Contrast] setting.

Taking Pictures Using Digital Filter

153

You can apply a filter when taking pictures.
The following filters can be selected.
Filter name

EffectParameter
Shading Level: +1/+2/+3

Toy Camera

For taking pictures thatlook as if taken with a toy
camera.

Retro

Toning: -3 to +3
For taking pictures with the
Frame Composite: None/Thin/look of old photos.
Medium/ThickHigh Contrast

For taking pictures withhigh contrasts.

Extract Color

For extracting a specificColor: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/
color and taking the rest of Green/Yellow
the picture in black andColor Freq. Range: -2 to +2
white.
For taking pictures with asoft focus throughout theimage.

Soft Focus: +1/+2/+3Soft

Effect Density: Small/Medium/
Large

Star Burst

For taking pictures of night
scenes or lights reflected
on water with a special
sparkling look achieved byadding cross-like effects tothe picture's highlights.

Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/
Yellow+1 to +5

Shadow Blur: On/Off

Size: Short/Medium/Long
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°

For taking pictures thatlook as if taken with a fish- Weak/Medium/Strong
eye lens.

4
Shooting Functions

Fish-eyeBlur: +1/+2/+3154
Filter name

EffectParameter
High Contrast: Off/+1 to +5
Soft Focus: Off/+1/+2/+3
Tone Break: Off/Red/Green/Blue/
Yellow

Custom Filter

Customize and save a filter Shading Type: 6 types
to your own preferences.
Shading Level: -3 to +3
Invert Color: Off/On
Distortion Type: 3 types
Distortion Level: Off/Weak/
Medium/Strong

4
Shooting Functions• When Digital Filter is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] and cannot
be changed. You cannot use Digital Filter when the file format is set to [RAW].
• When Digital Filter is set, Interval Shooting, Multi-exposure, Continuous
Shooting in the drive mode and Auto Bracket are not available.
• Digital Filter, Extended Bracketing and HDR Capture cannot be used at thesame time. The mode set last is used.
Depending on the filter used, images may take longer to save.

1

Select [Digital Filter] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The screen to select the filter appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (45)to select a filter.

OFF

Star Burst

AE.L

MENU Cancel

Check

OK OK

3

155
Use the four-way controller (23)to select the parameter and thefour-way controller (45) toadjust the parameter’s value.

Effect Density

AE.L

MENU Cancel

Check

OK OK

Available operations
Main switch (|)
L buttonPress the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• Select [Not use any filters] in Step 2 to finish shooting with digital filter.
• You can also apply digital filter effects to images after shooting them in
Playback mode (p.241).

4
Shooting Functions

4

You can use Digital Preview to preview thebackground image with the selected filter.
Saves the background image. Select [Save as] andpress the 4 button.

156

Shooting with the Live View
You can shoot a picture or a movie while displaying the real-time image on
the monitor.

4
Shooting Functions• The image in Live View may differ from the captured image if the brightnessof the subject is low or high.
• If any changes occur in the shooting light source during Live View, the image
may flicker.
• If the camera position is changed rapidly during Live View, the image may not
be displayed with the appropriate brightness. Wait for the display to become
stable before shooting.
• Noise may appear on the Live View image when used in dark locations.
• If you continue shooting with the Live View for a prolonged period, theinternal temperature of the camera may increase, resulting in lower quality
images. It is recommended that you turn off Live View when not shooting. To
prevent a decrease in image quality, allow the camera to cool down between
long exposure shots and movie recording.
• If the internal temperature of the camera is high, l (temperature warning) willappear on the monitor and Live View may not be possible.
• If Live View is used in places where the camera may become hot, such as indirect sunlight, l (temperature warning) may appear on the monitor. Cancel
Live View, as the internal temperature of the camera is rising.
• Live View can be displayed for up to 5 minutes. However, if Live View is usedeven after l (temperature warning) appears, Live View may end before 5
minutes elapse. Shooting with the viewfinder is possible even if Live View isended.
• The higher the sensitivity, the more noise and color unevenness may occur inthe Live View image and/or captured image.
• Shooting while holding the camera by hand and viewing the monitor cancause camera shake. Use of a tripod is recommended.
• The field of view of the image display is nearly 100%.
• You can use the provided AV cable (I-AVC7) or a commercially available
HDMI cable to display Live View images on a TV or monitor. (p.233)• Live View is not displayed when data are being saved to an SD Memory
Card.
• If the = button is pressed during Live View when the focus mode is set tol and [Autofocus Mode] is set to S (Phase Difference), the Live View
image will disappear and the autofocus system operates. Once focused, theimage will be displayed in Live View again.

157

Taking Still Pictures
Setting the Live View
You can set the display items and autofocus mode for Live View.

1

Select [Live View] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Live View] screen appears.

2

Live View
Info Overlay
Show Grid
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Autofocus Mode

MENU

3
4

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Autofocus
Mode] and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select an autofocus mode.

Live View
Info Overlay
Show Grid
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Autofocus Mode

MENU

Gives autofocus priority to detected faces andperforms contrast autofocus. A yellow frame
Face Detection +appears for the main face (white frames appear for
I Contrast AF
other faces), and autofocus and automatic(default setting)
exposure are performed for the main detectedface.
i Contrast AF

Displays Live View and performs autofocus basedon the information obtained from the image sensor.

Phase
Difference

Cancels Live View and performs autofocus with the
AF sensor.

S

4
Shooting Functions

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Info Overlay], [ShowGrid], [Histogram] or [Bright/DarkArea], and use the four-way
controller (45) to select O or P.

158

5
6

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
• It takes more time to focus on the subject when using [Contrast AF] thanwhen using [Phase Difference]. It is also difficult for the camera to focus on
the following objects (or with the following conditions).
- Objects with poor contrast- Objects with no vertical contrast, such as horizontal stripes- Objects with constantly changing brightness, shape, or color, such as awater fountain- Objects whose distance from the camera is changing- Small objects- Objects appearing in both the foreground and background- When using a special filter- Objects at the edge of the screen• Face detection is not performed when the focus mode is set to \.

4
Shooting Functions

Taking a Still Picture

1

Set the exposure mode.
Set the mode dial to any mode other than C.

2

Press the U button.

The mirror pops up and a real-time image is displayed on the monitor.
Press the U button again to exit Live View.
Live View can be displayed for up to 5 minutes. When the Live View
display is cancelled after the elapse of 5 minutes, Live View can berestarted by pressing the U button. If the internal temperature of thecamera is high, Live View may end before 5 minutes elapse.

159Live View display(All of the indications are displayed here for explanatory purposes.)

1P

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

P

2/5

USER

9

SHIFT

10
11
12

+1.0
-5 4 3 2 12000 F2.8

13 14

1 2 3 4 +5
ISO 3200

15 16 17

[ 1234 ]2000 F2.8

18

20

Exposure Mode
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
White Balance
Custom Image
Extended Bracketing/Multiexposure/Interval Shooting/
Digital Filter/HDR Capture

7

Number of shots using Multiexposure

89Battery level
Electronic Level

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

[

37 ]

19

AF frame
EV Compensation
Histogram
AE Lock
Shutter Speed
Aperture
EV barSensitivity
Remaining image storage
capacity

19 Face detection frame
20 Main face detection frame* Indicator 10 is displayed in white during Live View and turns green
when the subject is in focus. It turns red when the subject was not in
focus. It is not displayed when the focus mode is set to \.
* Indicators 19 and 20 are displayed when [Autofocus Mode] is set to I
and the camera detects person’s face(s). (Up to 16 face recognition
frames are displayed on the monitor.)

3

Position the subject on themonitor and press the =button.
The autofocus system operates.
When the focus mode is set to \, turnthe focusing ring until the subject isclearly visible on the focusing screen.

4
Shooting Functions

1
2
3
4
5
6

ISO 400

160

4

Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
• When the focus mode is set to l and [Autofocus Mode] is set to I or i,press the 4 button and use the four-way controller (2345) to change
the AF point. Press the 4 button again to cancel the changing of the AF
point.
• When the focus mode is set to k and [Autofocus Mode] is set to I ori, the camera focuses on the center of the screen when auto focusing
starts and then automatically tracks the subject when it is in focus.
• You can enlarge the image to 2, 4, or 6 times during Live View by pressing
the M button. Use the four-way controller (2345) to move the display
area, and press the | (Green) button to return the display to the center.
When the focus mode is set to \, press the M button to enlarge theimage to 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 times. Images captured in magnified display arerecorded at normal size.
• You can change the settings during Live View in the same way as whenshooting with the viewfinder.
• You can check the depth of field on the monitor by turning the main switch to| during Live View.

4
Shooting Functions

Recording Movies
You can record movies with a frame rate (number of frames shot per
second) at 30 frames per second (fps), monaural audio, and the file format
set to AVI.

Changing the Movie Settings

1

Select [Movie] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and press thefour-way controller (5).
The [Movie] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to select the number ofrecorded pixels.

00:00'00"
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
Sound
Movie Aperture Control Fixed
Shake Reduction

MENU Cancel

OK OK

161
Recorded Pixels

345

PixelsAspect Ratio

F

1536×1024

3:2

X (default setting)

1280×720

16:9

Y

640×416

3:2

Press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quality Level].
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way
controller (23) to select the quality level.

6
7
8

Press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sound].
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
O: Records sound. (default setting)P : Does not record sound.

9

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie
Aperture Control].

10 Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way
controller (23) to select [Auto] or [Fixed].
Auto:
Fixed:

The aperture is controlled automatically.
The movie is recorded at the aperture value set before movie
recording starts. (default setting)

11 Press the 4 button.

4
Shooting Functions

Select from C (Best; default setting), D (Better) and E (Good).
When the recorded pixels and quality level are changed, the amount ofrecordable time at that setting appears at the top right of the screen.

162

12 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Shake
Reduction].

13 Use the four-way controller (45) to select k or l.
k: Uses Shake Reduction.
l: Does not use Shake Reduction. (default setting)

14 Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to record a movie.
When [Sound] is set to O (On), the camera operation sounds are also
recorded. When recording a movie, mount the camera onto a tripod and do not
operate the camera while recording.

4
Shooting Functions

Connecting a Microphone
You can connect a commercially available stereo microphone (∅3.5 mm(1/8 inch) stereo mini plug) to the microphone terminal on the camera andrecord stereo sound. Using an external microphone can also help toreduce the possibility of recording the camera operation sounds.

1
2

Turn off the camera.
Open the microphone
terminal cover andconnect the plug of the
microphone to themicrophone terminalon the camera.

3163
Turn the camera on.
If the external microphone is disconnected during recording, the camera
cannot switch to the internal microphone until recording has stopped. No soundwill be recorded.
If you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo, the soundcan be played back in stereo when you use a commercially available HDMI
cable to output the movie to a HDMI-compatible AV device. (p.235) When you
use the AV cable to output the movie, monaural sound is played back.

Recording Movies
4

Set the mode dial to C.

The exposure mode is set to C (Movie),and Live View for movie capture isdisplayed.
Live View can be displayed for up to 5
minutes. When the Live View display iscancelled after the elapse of 5 minutes,
Live View can be restarted by pressing
the U button. If the internal temperatureof the camera is high, Live View may end
before 5 minutes elapse.

Shooting Functions

1

Sound

F2.8

00 : 30'00"

Recordable Time
Shake Reduction

164

2

Position the subject on themonitor and press the =button.
The autofocus system operates.
When the focus mode is set to \, turnthe focusing ring until the subject isclearly visible on the focusing screen.

3

Press the shutter release button fully.
Recording of the movie starts.

4

4

Press the shutter release button again.
Recording stops.

Shooting Functions• When [Sound] is set to O (On), the camera operation sounds are also
recorded. When recording a movie, mount the camera onto a tripod and do
not operate the camera while recording.
• While recording a movie, the autofocus system does not operate.
• The flash is not available.
• If you want to view a movie on an external monitor while recording it, connect
the camera to an AV device with an HDMI terminal (p.235). You cannot
output a movie using the PC/AV terminal while recording.
• You can record movies continuously up to 4 GB or 25 minutes. When the SD
Memory Card is full, recording stops and the movie is saved.
• If you intend to shoot continuously for a long period, use of the AC adapter
kit K-AC50 (optional) is recommended. (p.47)• You can also use the optional remote control to control recording operations.
(p.138)• When recording movies, only the White Balance and Custom Image (otherthan Fine Sharpness) settings can be used.
• The sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].
• If a high temperature is reached inside the camera during movie recording,
the recording may be terminated for the sake of circuit protection.

165
Playing Back Movies
Recorded movies can be played back in Playback mode in the samemanner as saved images.

1
2

Press the Q button.
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a movie toplay back.
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.

3

Press the four-way controller(2).

4Movie 10min00sec

100-0001

Available operations
Four-way controller (2)Pause/Resume

Rear e-dial (S)Four-way controller (5)Volume control (6 levels)
Frame advance (when paused)

Press and hold four-way
controller (5)Fast forward playback while pressed

Four-way controller (4)Reverse playback/
Frame reverse (when paused)

Press and hold four-way
controller (4)Four-way controller (3)Fast reverse playback while pressed
Stop

When the movie ends, playback stops and the first frame is displayed.
• You can use the provided AV cable (I-AVC7) or a commercially available
HDMI cable to play back the recorded movies on a TV or other AV device.
(p.233)• Even if you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo,monaural sound is played back when you output the movie via the PC/AV
terminal. When you output the movie via the HDMI terminal, sound is playedback in stereo.

Shooting Functions

Movie playback starts.

166
Capturing a Still Picture from a Movie
You can capture a single frame from a recorded movie and save it as a
JPEG still picture.

1
2

Pause the movie in Step 3 on p.165 to display the frame tosave as a still picture.
Press the L button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

4
Shooting Functions

3

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save as].

Saves the image as a new file

Save asCancel
OK OK

4Press the 4 button.
The captured image is saved as a new image.

5 Using the Flash
This chapter provides details on the built-in flash of Q
and describes how to take pictures with the external flash.

Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode..............................................................................168
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in
Flash ....................................................................171
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash .......172
Using an External Flash (Optional) ...................173

168

Flash Characteristics in Each
Exposure Mode
Using the Flash in b (Shutter Priority) Mode
• When taking a moving subject, you can use the flash to change the blureffect.
• Any desired shutter speed 1/180 seconds or slower can be set for taking a
flash photograph.
• The aperture value automatically changes according to the ambient
brightness.
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 seconds when a lens other thanDA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A is used.

Using the Flash in c (Aperture Priority) Mode
5
Using the Flash• You can set the desired aperture to take a flash photograph when you
want to change the depth of field or shoot a subject farther away.
• The shutter speed automatically changes with the ambient brightness.
• The shutter speed shifts automatically anywhere from 1/180 seconds
to a slow shutter speed (p.64) that reduces camera shake. The
slowest shutter speed depends on the focal length of the lens in use.
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 seconds when a lens other thanDA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F is used.

Using the Slow-Speed Sync
You can use slow-speed-sync in b (Shutter Priority) mode when shooting
portraits with the sunset in the background. Both the portrait and thebackground are captured beautifully.
• Slow-speed Sync shooting slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake
Reduction function or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod
to avoid camera shake. The picture will also blur if the subject moves.
• Slow-speed Sync shooting can also be performed with an external flash.

169
Using e/K/c mode

1
2

Set the mode dial to e, K or c.
Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up.

3

Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

4

Select G or H and press the 4 button.
The shutter speed is set slower to give the appropriate exposure for the
background.

5

Take the picture.

1
2

Set the mode dial to b, L or a.
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

34

Select E or F and press the 4 button.
Set the shutter speed (for b mode) or shutter speed andaperture (for L or a mode).
Set so that proper exposure is obtained in 1/180 seconds or slower.

5

Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up.

6

Take the picture.

Using the Flash

Using b/L/a mode

5

170

Using the Trailing Curtain Sync
Trailing Curtain Sync discharges the flash immediately before the shutter
curtain closes. When shooting moving objects with a slow shutter speed,
Trailing Curtain Sync and Slow-speed Sync produce different effects
depending on when the flash is discharged.
For example, when shooting a moving car with Trailing Curtain Sync,
trailing light is captured while the shutter is open and the flash captures the
car immediately before the shutter is closed. Therefore, the picture will
include a sharp, well-lit car with trailing lights behind it.

5
Using the Flash

Slow-speed Sync

1
2

Trailing Curtain Sync

Set the mode dial to any mode other than B, M or C.
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

34

Select I or k and press the 4 button.
Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up.

5

Take the picture.
Trailing Curtain Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction
function or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid
camera shake.

Distance and Aperture when Using
the Built-in Flash171

A set criteria is necessary between the guide number, aperture anddistance when shooting with the flash to obtain the correct exposure.
Calculate and adjust the shooting conditions if the flash output is not
sufficient.
ISO sensitivity
ISO 100
ISO 200
ISO 400
ISO 800
ISO 1600
ISO 3200

Built-in flash guide number
Approx. 13
Approx. 18.4
Approx. 26
Approx. 36.8
Approx. 52
Approx. 73.5

Calculating Shooting Distance from Aperture Value

5

The following equation calculates the distance of the flash for aperture values.
Maximum flash distance L1 = Guide number ÷ Aperture value
Minimum flash distance L2 = Maximum flash distance ÷ 5*

Using the Flash*The value 5 used in the formula above is a fixed value
which applies only when using the built-in flash alone.

Example: When the sensitivity is [ISO 100] and aperture value is F2.8
L1 = 13 ÷ 2.8 = approx. 4.6 (m)L2 = 4.6 ÷ 5 = approx. 0.9 (m)Therefore, the flash can be used in a range of about 0.9 m to 4.6 m.
The flash cannot be used when the distance is 0.7 m or less. When the
flash is used at closer than 0.7 m, it causes vignetting in the picture corners,
the light is distributed unevenly and the picture may be overexposed.

Calculating Aperture Value from Shooting Distance
The following equation calculates the aperture value for shooting
distances.
Aperture value F = Guide number ÷ Shooting distance
Example: When the sensitivity is [ISO 100] and shooting distance is 4 m,
aperture value isF = 13 ÷ 4 = 3.25
If the resulting number (3.25, in the above example) is not available asa lens aperture, the smaller number that is closest (2.8, in the above
example) is generally used.

172

Lens Compatibility with the Built-in
Flash
Depending on the lens used with the Q, even if a lens without a hoodis attached, the use of the built-in flash may not be possible or may belimited due to vignetting.
DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, and FA lenses not listed below can be used without
problems.
* Following are evaluated without a hood.
Unavailable due to vignetting
Lens name
DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm F3.5-4.5ED (IF)DA12-24mm F4ED AL
DA14mm F2.8ED (IF)5

FA300mm F2.8ED (IF)FA600mm F4ED (IF)Using the FlashFA250-600mm F5.6ED (IF)Available depending on other factors
Lens nameRestrictions

F FISH-EYE 17-28mm F3.5-4.5

Vignetting may occur if focal length is less than
20 mm.

DA16-45mm F4ED AL

When the focal length is less than 28 mm orwhen the focal length is 28 mm and the shooting
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.

DA16-50mm F2.8ED AL (IF) SDM

When the focal length is 20 mm or less or when
the focal length is 35 mm and the shooting
distance is less than 1.5 m, vignetting may
occur.

DA17-70mm F4AL (IF) SDM

When the focal length is less than 24 mm orwhen the focal length is 24 mm and the shooting
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.

DA18-250mm F3.5-6.3ED AL (IF)Vignetting may occur if the focal length is lessthan 35 mm.

FA28-70mm F2.8AL

Vignetting may occur if focal length is 28 mm
and the shooting distance is less than 1 m.

FA SOFT 28mm F2.8

Built-in flash always discharges fully.

FA SOFT 85mm F2.8

Built-in flash always discharges fully.

Using an External Flash (Optional)

173

Using the optional external flash AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC enables a variety of flash modes, such as P-TTL auto flash
mode, depending on the external flash being used. See the chart below for
details.
(z: Available #: Restricted ×: Not available)
Flash
Camera function

Built-inflash

AF540FGZ AF200FG
AF360FGZ AF160FC

Red-eye reduction flash

z

z

z

Automatic flash discharge

z

z

z

After the flash is fully charged, the camera
automatically switches to the flash sync
speed.

zzz

Aperture is automatically set in e and bmodes.

zzzAuto check in the viewfinder

×

×

×

P-TTL auto flash (appropriate sensitivity:
ISO 100 to 3200)

z*1

z*1

z*1

Slow-speed Sync

z

z

z

Flash exposure compensation

z

z

z

5

×

z

×

z

z

×

Contrast-control-sync flash mode

#*3

z

#*4

Slave flash

×

z

×

Multiple flash

×

×

×

High-speed flash sync

×

z

×

Wireless flash

#*4

z*5

×

*1 Available only when using DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens.
*2 Shutter speed of 1/90 seconds or slower.
*3 When combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, 1/3 of the flash discharge can be
output by the built-in flash and 2/3 can be output by the external flash.
*4 Available only when combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
*5 Multiple AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ units or a combination of an AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ
unit and the built-in flash is required.

Flashes with reversed polarity (the center contact on the hot shoe is minus)
cannot be used due to the risk of damaging the camera or flash.

Using the FlashAF Assist Light of the external flash
Trailing Curtain Sync*2

174
About the Display Panel for AF360FGZ
The AF360FGZ itself does not have the function to set the FORMAT
size to [DIGITAL]. However, when it is used with a SLR Digital
Camera, the difference in focal length between 35 mm film camera
and the Q is automatically calculated based on the difference inangle of view and is displayed on the panel (when using DA, DA L, D
FA, FA J, FA or F lens).
The conversion indicator appears and the format size indicator
disappears when the exposure metering timer of the Q is on (itreturns to 35 mm format display when the exposure metering timer isturned off).
Lens focal length 85mm 77mm 50mm 35mm 28mm 24mm 20mm 18 mm

5

Exposure metering
timer Off

85mm

70mm 50mm

35mm

28mm 24mm*

Exposure metering
timer On

58mm

48mm 34mm

24mm

19mm 16mm*

Using the Flash* Using wide-angle panel

Using P-TTL Auto Mode
You can use [P-TTL auto] with the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC flash unit. The flash pre-flashes before the actual flash andconfirms the subject (the distance, brightness, contrast, whether it isbacklit, etc.) using the camera 77-segment metering sensor. The flash
output for the actual flash is adjusted based on the information obtained
from the pre-flash, enabling flash photography with more appropriate
exposure for the subject than with normal TTL auto.

1
2
3
4

Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash.
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
Set the external flash mode to [P-TTL auto].
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and thentake the picture.

175• P-TTL auto is only available with the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC flash unit.
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).
• The flash does not discharge if the subject is bright enough when the flash
mode is C or i. Therefore, it may not be suitable for daylight-sync
shooting.
• Never press the E button when any external flash unit is attached to thecamera. The built-in flash will hit the external flash. If you want to use both atonce, set the wireless mode or connect them using the extension cord.
(p.180).
• For details such as operation method and effective distance, please read themanual for the external flash.

Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode
With the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, you can discharge the flash to take apicture at a shutter speed faster than 1/180 seconds.

2
3
4
5

Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) to the camera.
Set the exposure mode to b or a.
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
Set the external flash sync mode to HSb (High-speed
flash sync).
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and thentake the picture.
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).
• High-speed flash sync is available only when the shutter speed is faster than
1/180 seconds.
• High-speed flash sync is not available when the exposure mode is set to p
(Bulb).

Using the Flash

1

5

176

Using in Wireless Mode
By using two external flashes (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) or using thebuilt-in flash with an external flash, you can shoot in P-TTL flash mode
without connecting the flash units with a cord.
• Set the power switch of the external flash to WIRELESS.
• Two or more AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes are required to use
High-speed flash sync in the wireless mode. This function cannot be used in
combination with the built-in flash.
• Set the wireless mode of the external flash not directly connected to thecamera to SLAVE.

Setting the Channel for the External Flash on the Camera
5First set the channel for the external flash unit on the camera.

Using the Flash1
2
3

Set the channel for the external flash unit.
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash.
Turn on the camera and the external flash, and press the
shutter release button halfway.
The built-in flash is set to the same channel as the external flash unit.
• When set to r mode, the channel currently set for the built-in flash isdisplayed in the viewfinder for 10 seconds.
• Be sure to set all the flashes to the same channel. Refer to the manual of
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ for details on how to set the channel on theexternal flash.

177
Using the Built-in Flash Wirelessly
Set the camera to wireless flash mode when using an external flash incombination with the built-in flash.

1

Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

2

Select r and press the 4
button.

Flash Mode
Wireless Mode

The camera is ready to take a picture.

0.0
MENU Cancel

OK OK

5

Changing the Built-in Flash Discharge Method
You can change the built-in flash discharge method in wireless mode.
Set in [31. Flash in Wireless Mode] in the [A Custom Setting 5] menu
(p.87).
1

On

Discharges the built-in flash as a master. (Default setting)2

OffDischarges the built-in flash as a control flash.

HSb (High-speed flash sync) is not available with the built-in flash.

Using the Flash• r cannot be set when the exposure mode is set to B (Green).
• When the drive mode is set to i (Remote Control (3s delay)), d (Mirror
lock-up) or e (Mirror lock-up remote control), or the lens aperture is not set
to the s position, r cannot be selected.

178
Wireless Shooting
Using a Combination of the Built-in Flash and an External Flash
Unit

1
2
3

Remove the external flash unit after the channel was set
on the camera, and place at the desired location.
Set the flash mode of the camera to r, and press the E
button.
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then takethe picture.
Using a Combination of External Flash Units

5
Using the Flash1

2
3

Set the wireless mode of the external flash directly
connected to the camera to [MASTER] or [CONTROL].
MASTER

Discharges both the flash directly connected to the camera
and the wireless flash unit.

CONTROL

The flash directly connected to the camera is discharged asa control flash only and does not discharge as main flash.

On the wireless remote flash unit, set the wireless flash
mode to [SLAVE] and set the channel to the same channel
as the flash directly connected to the camera. Then, placeat the desired location.
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then takethe picture.
• [Shake Reduction] and [Horizon Correction] are automatically turned off in
the wireless mode.
• When using multiple AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes and performing
high-speed flash sync shooting in the wireless mode, set the flash directly
connected to the camera to high-speed flash sync mode.

179
Wireless Flash Control (P-TTL Flash Mode)
When using external flash units (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) for
wireless shooting, the following information is exchanged between
the flash units before the flash is discharged.
Press the shutter release button fully.
↓
1 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash(relays the flash mode of the camera).
2 The wireless remote flash emits a control flash (relays
confirmation of subject).
3 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash(relays flash output to the wireless remote flash).
* The flash directly connected to the camera will emit a control flash one
more time after this to relay the flash duration time when HSb (Highspeed flash sync) is set.

4 The wireless remote flash discharges at the same time as themain flash.

Red-Eye Reduction
As with the built-in flash, red-eye reduction is available with an external
flash. However, depending on the type of the flash, this function may not
be available or may have some restrictions for usage conditions. See thechart on p.173.
• The red-eye reduction function works by discharging the flash twice evenwhen only an external flash is used. (p.75)• If red-eye reduction of the built-in flash is used when the external flash is set
as the slave unit or with the wireless function, the preflash for red-eye
reduction will trigger the external flash. Do not use red-eye reduction whenusing a slave unit.

Using the FlashWhen the wireless mode of the external flash directly connected to thecamera is set to [MASTER] or [31. Flash in Wireless Mode] (p.177) is set
to [On] for the built-in flash, all the flashes will discharge simultaneously.

5

180

Trailing Curtain Sync
When using the built-in flash with an external flash (AF540FGZ or
AF360FGZ) that is set to the Trailing Curtain Sync function, the built-in
flash will also use this mode. Confirm that both flash units are fully charged
before shooting.

Connecting an External Flash with an
Extension Cord

5
Using the FlashWhen using the built-in flash with an external flash that does not havewireless flash mode function such as AF200FG, attach the Hot Shoe
Adapter FG (optional) to the camera hot shoe and an Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (optional) to the bottom of the external flash, and connect thesewith the Extension Cord F5P (optional) as shown in the illustration below.
The Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F can be mounted using the tripod screw
to your tripod.
Only the P-TTL auto flash can be used in combination with the built-in
flash.
When combining with the built-in flash

181

Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension
Cords
You can combine two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG) or you can use two or more external flashes in combination withthe built-in flash. You can use the extension cord connection terminal on
the flash to connect the AF540FGZ. You can connect AF360FGZ or
AF200FG unit as shown in the illustration below. Connect an external flash
and the Hot Shoe Adapter F (optional) to the Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F(optional) and then connect another Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F withexternal flash using the Extension Cord F5P (optional).
Refer to the manual of the flash for details.
When combining two or more external flashes
5
Using the Flash• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts
such as a Hot Shoe Grip as a malfunction may occur.
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.
When using multiple external flashes or an external flash with the built-in flash,
P-TTL is used for flash control.

182

Contrast-Control-Sync Flash
Combining two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG) or using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash
allows multiple flash photography (contrast-control-sync flash
photography). This is based on the difference between the amounts oflight discharged from multiple units.
• The AF200FG must be combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts
such as a Hot Shoe Grip as a malfunction may occur.
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment
breakdown. We recommend using PENTAX automatic flashes.

1
5 2
Using the Flash3
4

Connect the external flash to the camera indirectly. (p.180)
Set the sync mode for the external flash to the ContrastControl-Sync mode.
Set the exposure mode to e, b, c or a.
Confirm that both the external flash and built-in flash are
fully charged and then take a picture.
• When using two or more external flashes and the contrast-control-sync modeis set on the external master flash unit, the flash output ratio is 2 (master unit): 1 (slave units). When external flash is used in combination with the built-in
flash, the flash output ratio is 2 (external flash) : 1 (built-in flash).
• When using multiple external flashes or an external flash with the built-in
flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.

183

X-sync Socket
You can connect an external flash to thecamera with a sync cord by using the X-sync
socket.
Remove the Sync socket 2P cap andconnect a sync cord to the X-sync socket.

5
Using the Flash• The use of high-voltage or high-current external flashes may cause a camera
breakdown.
• Flashes with reversed polarity (the center of the sync plug is minus) cannot
be used due to the risk of damaging the camera or flash.
• When a sync cord is connected to the X-sync socket, linked functions will not
work.
• To prevent vignetting caused from Trailing Curtain Sync, it is recommended
to take a test shot using a shutter speed one level slower than the flash sync
speed.
• The contact of the X-sync socket is not dust-proof and water-resistant. Attach
the provided Sync socket 2P cap when not in use.

184

Memo

6 Shooting Settings
This chapter describes how to set the save format for
pictures taken and other settings.

Setting the File Format ......................................186
Setting the White Balance .................................191
Correcting Images ..............................................199
Setting the Image Finishing Tone (Custom Image)..............................................................................205
Storing Frequently Used Settings ....................207

Setting the File Format

186

Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels
You can select the number of recorded pixels from W, J, P and i.
The more pixels there are, the larger the picture and the bigger the filesize. The file size will also differ according to the [JPEG Quality] setting.
The default setting is W.

6

Recorded Pixels

PixelsPaper Size

W

4672×3104

14"×17" / A2 paper

J

3936×2624

10"×12" / A3 paperP

3072×2048

8"×10" / A4 paperi1728×1152

5"×7" / A5 paper

Shooting Settings

The paper sizes above are references for optimal printing by recorded
pixels. The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on thequality level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety ofother factors.

1
2

Select [JPEG Recorded Pixels] in the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select the number of recorded
pixels.
When the number of recorded pixels ischanged, the number of recordable
images appears at the top right of thescreen.

3
4

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

120
File Format
JPEG
JPEG Recorded Pixels 14M
JPEG Quality
10M
ISO AUTO Setting
6M
D-Range Setting
2M
Lens Correction
MENU Cancel

OK OK

187

Setting the JPEG Quality Level
You can set the image quality level. The file size will also differ according
to the [JPEG Recorded Pixels] setting. The default setting is C (Best).
Z Premium

Images will be clearer but file size will be larger.

C BestD

Better

E

Good

1
2

Images will be grainier but file size will be smaller.

Select [JPEG Quality] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select the quality level.

MENU Cancel

3
4

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

OK OK

6
Shooting Settings

When the quality level is changed, thenumber of recordable images at that
quality level appears at the top right of thescreen.

120
File Format
JPEG
JPEG Recorded Pixels 14M
JPEG Quality
ISO AUTO Setting
D-Range Setting
Lens Correction

188

Setting the File Format
You can set the format of image files.
JPEG

Captures images in JPEG format. You can change the number ofrecorded pixels in [JPEG Recorded Pixels] and the image quality level
in [JPEG Quality]. (default setting)RAW

RAW data are CMOS sensor output data saved without processing.
Effects of White Balance, Custom Image and Color Space are notapplied to the images, but they are saved as actual original
information. When you perform the development process by using
RAW Development function (p.247), or using the provided software(PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4) after transferring RAW data to acomputer, you can create JPEG or TIFF images with these effects.

RAW+

Images are saved in both RAW and JPEG formats. When the |button is pressed, images are temporarily captured in both formats.
(p.189)When Extended Bracketing (p.151), Digital Filter (p.153) or HDR Capture(p.200) is set, the file format is set to [JPEG] and cannot be changed. Tochange the file format, turn these functions off.

6
Shooting Settings

1
2

Select [File Format] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select a file format.
When the file format is changed, thenumber of recordable image appears at
the top right of the screen.

3
4

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

120
JPEG
File Format
JPEG
JPEG Recorded Pixels RAW
RAW+
JPEG Quality
ISO AUTO Setting
D-Range Setting
Lens Correction
‫ޓ‬
OK OK
MENU Cancel

189
Setting the RAW File Format
You can select PEF or DNG format in [RAWFile Format] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu
(p.84) when images are captured in RAW
format.

1 2 3 4

Color SpaceRAW File Format
RAW Button
MemoryUSER
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
MENU Cancel

sRGB
PEF
DNG

OK OK

PEF

PENTAX original RAW file format (default setting)

DNG

General-purpose, publicly available RAW file format designed by
Adobe Systems

Setting the RAW Button Function
You can set the function when the | button is pressed.

1

The [RAW Button] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (45)to select O or P for [Cancel after
1 shot].

RAW Button
Cancel after 1 shot
JPEG

RAW+

RAW

RAW+

RAW+

RAW+

MENU

O

The recording format returns to the original file format after apicture taken. (default setting)
The setting is canceled when the following operations are
performed.

P- the | button is pressed again- the Q or 3 button is pressed- the main switch turned off- the mode dial is turned

6
Shooting Settings

Select [RAW Button] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).

190

3

Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a file format.
The left side is the [File Format] setting and the right side is the file format
when the | button is pressed.

4

Press the four-way controller(5), and use the four-way
controller (23) to select a fileformat when the | button ispressed.

RAW Button
Cancel after 1 shot
JPEG
RAW

RAW+
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
RAW+

RAW+

RAW+

MENU Cancel

5
6

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

6
Shooting Settings

Setting the White Balance

191

White balance is the function for adjusting the color of an image so thatwhite objects appear white. Set the white balance if you are not satisfied
with the color balance of pictures taken with white balance set to F
(Auto), or to intentionally apply a creative effect to your images.
Item
F AutoG

Daylight

Settings

Color
Temperature*1

Automatically adjusts the white balance. Approx. 4,000 to(default setting)
8,000KFor use when taking pictures in sunlight. Approx. 5,200K

H ShadeFor use when taking pictures in theshade. It reduces the bluish color tones
in a picture.

Approx. 8,000K^ Cloudy

For use when taking pictures on cloudydays.

Approx. 6,000K

J

FluorescentLight

For use when taking pictures underfluorescent lighting. Select the type offluorescent light.
D Fluorescent Light Daylight Color
N Fluorescent Light Daylight WhiteW Fluorescent Light Cool White
L Fluorescent Light Warm WhiteI

TungstenLight

For use when taking pictures under lightbulb or other tungsten light. It reduces
the reddish color tones in a picture.

Approx. 2,850K

L FlashFor use when taking pictures using thebuilt-in flash.

Approx. 5,400K

CTE *2

Use this to keep and strengthen thecolor tone of the light source in theimage.

–K Manual

Use this to manually adjust the whitebalance according to the lighting so thatwhite objects appear as a natural white.

–

Color
Use figures to set the color temperature.
Temperature You can save three settings.

–

Approx. 6,500K
Approx. 5,000K
Approx. 4,200K
Approx. 3,000K*1 The color temperature (K) is an estimate. This does not indicate precise colors.
*2 CTE= Color Temperature Enhancement

Shooting Settings

K

6

192

1

Press the four-way controller (4) in Capture mode.
The [White Balance] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (23)to select the white balance.

White Balance
Auto

CTE
AE.L

MENU Cancel

Check

OK OK

Available operations

6

3

Main switch (|)

You can use Digital Preview to preview thebackground image with the setting applied.

L button

Saves the background image. Select [Save as] andpress the 4 button.

Press the 4 button.

Shooting Settings

The camera is ready to take a picture.
• The camera automatically performs fine-tuning even when the light source is
specified. The color temperature of the light source is fixed when [11. WB
Adjustable Range] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu (p.85) is set to [Fixed].
• Because the light source changes when the flash discharges, you can set thewhite balance for when the flash discharges. Select [Auto White Balance],[Unchanged] or [Flash] in [10. WB When Using Flash] in the [A Custom
Setting 2] menu (p.85).

193

Fine-tuning the White Balance
You can fine-tune the white balance settings.

1
2

Perform desired settings in Step 2 on p.192.
Press the four-way controller (5).
The fine-tuning screen appears.

3

Fine-tune the white balance.

Shade

Seven levels (225 patterns) are available
on the G-M and B-A axes.

G

G1

±0

A

B
M

±0
MENU Cancel

Check

OK OK

Available operations

Four-way controller (45)
| (Green) button

4

Adjusts the tone of the colors between
green (G) and magenta (M).
Adjusts the tone of the colors between
blue (B) and amber (A).
Resets the adjustment value.

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.

5

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
When set to K, the white balance can also be measured by pressing the
shutter release button fully (except while recording a movie).

Shooting Settings

Four-way controller (23)

6

194

Adjusting the White Balance Manually
You can adjust the white balance depending on the light source when
taking pictures. With the manual white balance, the camera can store
delicate shades that cannot be precisely adjusted with the white balance
preset values provided in the camera. This provides the optimum whitebalance for your surroundings.

1
2

Select K/K in Step 2 on p.192 and press the four-way
controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select K and press the fourway controller (5).

White Balance
Manual

5000k
5000k
5000k
MENU Cancel

CTE

6
Shooting Settings

3
4

Check

OK OK

Under the light to measure the white balance, fully display
a white sheet of paper in the viewfinder or select a whitearea as the subject.
Press the shutter release button fully.
Set the focus mode to \ when the shutter cannot be released.
The screen to select the measuring range is displayed.

5

Use the rear e-dial (S) to selectthe entire screen or spot area forthe measuring range.

MENU Cancel

OK OK

6

195
When a spot area is selected, use
the four-way controller (2345)
to move the frame to the position
you want to measure.

MENU Cancel

7

Press the 4 button.
The white balance fine-tuning screen
appears when measuring is completed.
Adjust the white balance if necessary.
(p.193)

OK OK

ManualWhite Balance
SHUTTER Adjust

±0

±0

G

M
AE.L

±0
MENU Cancel

8

A

B

Check

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• No image is recorded when the shutter release button is pressed to adjust
the white balance.
• [The operation could not be completed correctly] appears when measuring is
unsuccessful. Press the 4 button while displayed to return to the screen
for remeasuring.
• If the picture is extremely overexposed or underexposed, white balance may
not be adjusted. In this case, adjust appropriate exposure first and thenadjust the white balance.
• When the mode dial is set to C (Movie), the white balance cannot bemeasured. Adjust the white balance in any exposure mode other thanC (Movie) before recording a movie.

Shooting Settings

9

6

196

Adjusting the White Balance with Color
Temperature
Use figures to set the color temperature.

1
2

Select K/K in Step 2 of p.192 and press the four-way
controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the color
temperature (default setting: 5000K).
You can save three settings. Settings are saved to the location selected
here.

3

Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Color Temperature] screen appears.

64

Adjust the color temperature withthe front or rear e-dial.

Color
Temperature

K

Shooting Settings

G

5000K
±0

A

B

±0

M

±0
MENU Cancel

Check

OK OK

Color temperature steps differ depending on the e-dial.
e-dialKelvinMired*

Front (R)

1 Step (100K)

1 Step (20M)

Rear (S)

10 Steps (1000K)

5 Steps (100M)* The default setting for Color Temperature step units is [Kelvin]. You can change thestep units to [Mired] in [21. Color Temperature Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 3]
menu (p.86). However, figures are converted to Kelvin and displayed.

You can also use the steps for “Fine-tuning the White Balance” (p.193)
for fine-tuning.

5

197
Press the 4 button.
The settings are saved and the camera returns to the [White Balance]screen.
Turn the main switch to | to display Digital Preview with the set color
temperature.

6

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

Color Temperature
The color of light shifts towards blue as the color temperature rises,
and towards red as the color temperature falls. Color temperaturedescribes this change in light color in terms of absolute temperature(K: Kelvin). This camera is capable of setting the white balance toenable taking pictures with natural coloring under a variety of lighting
conditions.
Red tint
3000

4000

5000 6000

8000

6

10000 12000 [ K ]Clear sky

Shade

Daylight (Fluorescent light)

CloudyDaylight Flash
Neutral white (Fluorescent light)

White (Fluorescent light)

Halogen light bulb

Tungsten light

Oil lamp

Candle flame

Shooting Settings

2000

Blue tint

198

Saving the White Balance Setting of a
Captured Image
You can copy the white balance setting of a captured image and save it as
Manual White Balance.

1
2

In Playback mode, display the image with the whitebalance setting you want to copy.
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select K (Saveas Manual WB) and press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (45) to select the image.

6

4

Shooting Settings

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Save] and press the
4 button.
The white balance setting of the selected
image is saved to Manual White Balance
and the camera switches to Capturemode. The white balance setting is K
(Manual).

100-0105
Manual White Balance is
now set according to thecurrent images's color balance
Save
Cancel
OK OK• Only the white balance setting of still pictures captured with this camera canbe copied.
• You cannot select a still picture that has been captured from a movie andsaved.

Correcting Images

199

The camera and lens properties can be automatically adjusted when
taking pictures.

Adjusting the Brightness
Adjusts the brightness and prevents bright and dark areas from occurring.

D-Range Setting
Expands the dynamic range and the light level expressed by the CMOS
sensor and prevents bright and dark areas from occurring.

1

Select [D-Range Setting] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [D-Range Setting] screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Highlight
Correction].
Use the four-way controller (45)to select O or P.

D-Range Setting
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction

MENU

4
5
6

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Shadow
Correction].
Use the four-way controller (45) to select off, low,
medium or high.
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

Shooting Settings

2

6

200
When [Highlight Correction] is set to [O] (On), the minimum sensitivity is ISO
200.

HDR Capture
Enables the capture of images at high dynamic range. Takes three frames(underexposed, standard (proper exposure) and overexposed) to create asingle composite image with them.

1
2

Select [HDR Capture] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Off], [Standard], or[Strong].

6
Shooting Settings

34

1 2 3 4Program Line
Extended Bracketing
HDR Capture
Digital Filter
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
Composition Adjust.
MENU Cancel

OFF

Off
Standard
Strong

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• When HDR Capture is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] and cannot
be changed. You cannot use HDR Capture when the file format is set to[RAW].
• When HDR Capture is set, Interval Shooting and Multi-exposure are notavailable. Also, the drive modes other than 9 (Single Frame Shooting) andh (Remote Control) are not available.
• HDR Capture, Extended Bracketing and Digital Filter cannot be used at thesame time. The mode set last is used.
• HDR Capture is not available when the exposure mode is set to p (Bulb) or
M (Flash X-sync Speed) mode.
• During HDR Capture, multiple frames are combined together to create asingle image, so it takes time to save an image.
• During HDR Capture, pressing the 3 button while an image is being
saved cancels the process and saves the image as a standard image.
• [Shake Reduction] is automatically set to l (Off) when HDR Capture isset. In this case, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

201

Lens Correction
Reduces distortions and lateral chromatic aberrations occurring due tolens properties.
Distortion
Distortion is the phenomenon in which the center of the image appears
inflated (barrel distortion) or the center of the image appears pinched(pincushion distortion). Distortion occurs more easily when using azoom lens or a lens with a small aperture, and straight walls or thehorizon in the image appears curved.

Barrel distortion

Lateral chromatic aberration
Lateral chromatic aberration is the phenomenon in which themagnification of the image varies according to the colors (wavelengthsof light) when a picture is taken, and may cause a blurred image.
Chromatic aberration occurs more easily at shorter focal lengths.

6
Shooting Settings

Pincushion distortion

202• Corrections can only be made when using a DA, DA L or D FA lens. [Lens
Correction] cannot be selected when an incompatible lens is attached.
• [Distortion Correction] is disabled when using a DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm.
• The Lens Correction function is disabled when using an accessory such as aclose-up ring or rear converter that is attached between the camera and thelens.
• The shooting speed for continuous shooting may be slower when [Lens
Correction] is set to O (On).
• The effects of Lens Correction function may be barely noticeable in somecases due to the shooting conditions or other factors.

1

Select [Lens Correction] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [Lens Correction] screen appears.

2
6

3

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Distortion
Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj].
Use the four-way controller (45)to select O or P.

Lens Correction

Shooting Settings

Distortion Correction
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj

MENU

4

Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
When a compatible lens is attached and the file format is set to [RAW] or[RAW+], the correction information is saved as a RAW file parameter and you
can select on or off when developing RAW images. (p.250)

203

Adjusting the Composition
Adjusts the Shake Reduction unit in the X-Y direction or rotation direction
for a better composition position and a more level camera. Use this when
you want to adjust the composition, such as when using a tripod.

1

Select [Composition Adjust.] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The screen for adjusting the composition appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Start Adjustment] andpress the 4 button.
Live View is displayed and thecomposition can be adjusted.

Composition Adjust.
Please note: depending on thelens, adjusting the composition
may cause vignetting
Start Adjustment
Cancel
OK OK

Adjust the composition.
Adjust the composition of
the image

MENU Cancel

OK OK

Available operations
Four-way controller(2345)
Rear e-dial (S)| (Green) button

Moves the composition up, down, left or right.
Adjust from approximately -1 mm to +1 mm on
the image sensor.
Adjusts the level of the composition. Adjustfrom approximately -1° to +1°.
Resets the adjustment value.

Shooting Settings

3

6

204

4

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to normal Live View and is ready to take a picture.
The saved adjustment value is reset when the Live View is ended.

6
Shooting Settings

Setting the Image Finishing Tone
(Custom Image)205

You can set the image finishing tone before shooting. Select from thefollowing seven modes for [Image Tone]: Bright (default setting), Natural,
Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted and Monochrome. You can adjust thefollowing items for [Image Tone].
Item

Settings
Sets the color saturation. (Available settings: -4 to +4)

Hue*1

Sets the color. (Available settings: -4 to +4)

High/Low Key Adj

Changes the brightness of the image. (Available settings: -4
to +4)

Contrast

Sets the image contrast. (Available settings: -4 to +4)
You can also change the setting to Contrast Highlight
Adjustment or Contrast Shadow Adjustment.

Sharpness*2

Sets the sharpness of the image outlines. (Available settings:-4 to +4)

Filter Effect*3

Changes the contrast to appear as if a B&W color filter wasused. Sets the filter color. (Available settings: [None],[Green], [Yellow], [Orange], [Red], [Magenta], [Blue], [Cyan],[Infrared Filter])Toning*3

Sets the level for cold tone adjustment (- direction) and warm
tone adjustment (+ direction). (Available settings: -4 to +4)*1 This can be set when any mode other than [Monochrome] is selected.
*2 You can also change the setting to [Fine Sharpness], which makes image outlines eventhinner and sharper.
*3 This can be set when [Monochrome] is selected.

Custom Image cannot be set when the mode dial is set to B (Green) or C
(Movie) mode.

1

Press the four-way controller (5) in Capture mode.
The Custom Image options screen appears.
After the power is turned on, the last image taken is displayed in the
background.

6
Shooting Settings

Saturation*1

206

2

Use the four-way controller (45)to choose the image tone mode.

Bright
R
Y

M

B

G
C

MENU Cancel

3

Portrait
R
Y

M

B

G
C

MENU Cancel

4

F

OK OK

Use the four-way controller (23)to choose an item.
When [Image Tone] is set to[Monochrome], you can change thesettings for [Filter Effect], [Toning],[Contrast] and [Sharpness].

6

AE.L

Check

AE.L

F

Check

OK OK

Use the four-way controller (45) to change the setting.

Shooting Settings

The background image changes according to the setting.
You can visually check the saturation and hue with the radar chart. (Thisis not displayed when [Image Tone] is set to [Monochrome].)Available operations
Front e-dial (R)Switches between enabling and disabling
contrast settings.

Rear e-dial (S)Switches between [Sharpness] and [FineSharpness]. When set to [Fine Sharpness],
image outlines can be captured with more detail.
You can use Digital Preview to preview thebackground image with the setting applied. (Notavailable during Live View.)
Saves the background image. Select [Save as]
and press the 4 button. (Not available during
Live View.)

Main switch (|)

L button5

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

Storing Frequently Used Settings

207

By using A function, you can store the current camera settings andeasily retrieve them.
The following settings can be stored.
• Exposure Mode
• Drive Mode
• Flash Mode/Flash Exposure Comp.
• White Balance• Sensitivity/Sensitivity AUTO Range• EV Compensation• Program Line
• Exposure Bracketing• Extended Bracketing (Bracketing
Amount/Type)• JPEG Recorded Pixels• JPEG Quality• File Format• RAW File Format• D-Range Setting• HDR Capture• Custom Image• Digital Filter• Shake Reduction• Horizon Correction• Lens Correction• Color Space• [A Custom Setting 1-6]
menu settings

Saving the Settings
Saves the settings to A.

1
2

Make the necessary settings.
Select [USER] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press thefour-way controller (5).
The [USER] screen appears.

Shooting Settings

A function cannot be set when the mode dial is set to B (Green) or C
(Movie) mode.

6

208

3

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save] and press thefour-way controller (5).
The [Save] screen appears.

USER
Save
Check Saved USER Settings
Reset USER Settings

MENU

4

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Save] and press the
4 button.

Save
Saves current settings
in USER mode

The settings are saved as A.
Save
Cancel
OK OK

Checking the Saved USER Settings

6
Shooting Settings

1

Select [Check Saved USER Settings] in Step 3 of “Saving
the Settings” and press the four-way controller (5).
The current settings saved as A are displayed.

2

Use the four-way controller (45)to navigate the pages.

Check Saved USER Settings

P

2.0x5
ISOAUTO 200-800-R
AWB G1 A1 D200
-0.5 WB+0.5
JPEG 14M
1 2

3

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [USER] screen.

±0
±0
±0
±0
BA ±1
±0
±0
AdobeRGB
±0
OK OK

209

Using Saved USER Settings
You can easily retrieve saved settings.

1

Set the mode dial to A.
The saved settings are retrieved.

2

Change the settings asnecessary.
To change the exposure mode, use[Exposure Mode] in the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu. This menu appears only when themode dial is set to A.

3

1 2 3 4

P
Exposure ModesRGB
Sv
File Format
PEF
Tv
JPEG Recorded Pixels Av
JPEG Quality
TAv
ISO AUTO Setting
M
B
D-Range SettingX
Lens Correction
OK OK
MENU Cancel

Take a picture.

Changing the Settings
Changes the settings saved as A.

1
2

Perform Steps 1 and 2 of “Using Saved USER Settings”.
Perform Steps 2 to 4 of “Saving the Settings” (p.207).
The settings are changed and saved again.

6
Shooting Settings

The settings changed in Step 2 are not saved as A. When the camera isturned off, the original saved settings are applied.

210

Resetting to Default Settings
Resets the settings saved as A to the default settings.

1

Select [Reset USER Settings] in Step 3 of “Saving theSettings” (p.207) and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Reset USER Settings] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
The A settings return to the default
values.

Reset USER Settings
Returns USER settings todefault values
Reset
CancelOK OK

6
Shooting Settings

7 Playback Functions
This chapter describes how to use the various playback
functions in Playback mode.

Playback Functions Operation ..........................212
Enlarging Images ...............................................214
Displaying Multiple Images ...............................216
Slideshow ............................................................222
Rotating Images .................................................225
Comparing Images .............................................226
Deleting Multiple Images ...................................227
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect) ......231
Connecting the Camera to AV Equipment .......233

212

Playback Functions Operation
Perform settings related to playing back images in the playback mode
palette or [Q Playback] menu.
For details on how to operate the menus, see “Using the Menus” (p.36).

Playback Mode Palette Setting Items
Press the four-way controller (3) inPlayback mode to display the playback
mode palette.
You can display the playback mode paletteeven when the movie is paused.

Slideshow

7
Playback Functions

Plays a slideshow withall captured images
MENU Cancel

Item

Function

OK OK

Page

s Image Rotation

Rotates images.

p.225

D Digital Filter*1

Changes the color tone of images, adds
softening and slimming effects, oradjusts the brightness.

p.241

n Resize*1

Changes the number of recorded pixels
and quality level and saves it as a newimage.

p.238

o Cropping

Cuts out only the desired area of thepicture and saves it as a new image.

p.239

u Slideshow

Plays back the images one after another. p.222

213
Item

FunctionPage

K Save as Manual WB

You can copy the white balance settingof a captured image and save it as
Manual White Balance.

p.198

h RAW Development*2

Converts RAW images to JPEG format.

p.247

p Index

Joins a number of images together andcreates a new image from them.

p.219

g Image Comparison

Displays two images side-by-side.

p.226

Z ProtectProtects images from being accidentallyerased.

p.231

r DPOF*1

Sets the DPOF settings.

p.273*1 This cannot be performed when a RAW image is displayed.
*2 This cannot be performed when a JPEG image is displayed.

Playback Menu Setting Items
You can perform the following settings in the[Q Playback ] menu.
Press the 3 button in Playback mode todisplay the [Q Playback 1] menu.
7

Q1

Item

Function

Page

Slideshow

Plays back the images one after another.
You can set how images will be displayedin the slideshow.

p.222

Playback Display
MethodSets whether to display the Bright/Dark
Area warning in Playback mode and also
sets the initial magnification whenenlarging images.

p.215

Delete All Images

You can delete all saved images at once.

p.230

Playback Functions

Menu

Enlarging Images

214

Images can be magnified up to 32 times in Playback mode.

1

Use the four-way controller (45)to select an image in Playback
mode.

JPEG 1/ 2000 F5.6

2

Turn the rear e-dial (S) to theright (toward y).

100-0001

100-0001

The image enlarges at each click (1.2 times
to 32 times).

x20

7

Available operations

Playback Functions

Four-way controller (2345)
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y)/m button

Moves area to enlarge.
Enlarges image (up to 32 times)

Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f)/| (Green) button

Reduces image (up to 1.2 times*)

4 button
Front e-dial (R)Returns to the original size
Retains the magnification and theposition of the magnification areaand shows previous/next image
Switches information display On/Off

M button* The default setting for the first click (minimum magnification) is 1.2 times. You canchange this in [Playback Display Method] in [Q Playback 1] menu. (p.215)

215• You can enlarge the image by following the same procedure during InstantReview (p.68), Digital Preview (p.131) or Live View (p.156).
• The initial full display of vertical images is displayed with a magnification of
0.75 times that of horizontal images, therefore, magnification at the first click
starts at 1.0 times.

Setting the Playback Display Method
You can set whether or not to display the Bright/Dark Area warning in
Playback mode and set the initial magnification when enlarging images.

1

Select [Playback Display Method] in the [Q Playback 1]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Playback Display Method] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (45)to select O or P for [Bright/DarkArea].

Playback Display Method
Bright/Dark Area
Quick Zoom

Off

7

MENU

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quick Zoom].
Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to select the magnification.

Playback Display Method
Bright/Dark Area
Quick Zoom

Select from [Off] (default setting), [×2],[×4], [×8], [×16] or [×32].
MENU Cancel

5
6

Off
X2
X4
X8
X16
X32
OK OK

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Playback Functions

3
4

Displaying Multiple Images

216

Multi-image Display Screen
You can display 4, 9, 16, 36 or 81 images on the monitor at the same time.
The default setting is [9].

1Turn the rear e-dial (S) to theleft (toward f) in Playbackmode.

The multi-image display screen
appears.
Up to nine thumbnail images will be
displayed at once.

Frame

7
Playback Functions

INFO

100-0001
Scroll bar

217

Available operations
Four-way controller(2345)

Moves selection frame

M button

Displays the [Multi-img Display Setting] screen. Use
the four-way controller (45) to select the number ofimages to display at the same time.

Multi-img Display Setting
Display TypeMENU Cancel INFO

OK OK([Display Type] cannot be selected when developing
multiple RAW images (p.248).)
i button2

Select the multiple images and press to delete. (p.227)

Press the 4 button.
A full screen display of the selected
image appears.

7
100-0001

Icons such as C and ? are not displayed with thumbnail images for 81-image
display.

Displaying Images by Folder
Images will be grouped and displayed by the folder in which they are saved.

1

On the multi-image display
screen, turn the rear e-dial (S)again to the left (toward f).
The folder display screen appears.

Playback Functions

JPEG 1/ 2000 F5.6

218

2

Select the folder you want todisplay.

100

101

12345
102

103

104

105

Available operations
Four-way controller (2345)
i button3

100_0105
Moves selection frame.
Deletes the selected folder and all
the images in it. (p.228)

Press the 4 button.
The multi-image display screen for the selected folder appears.

Displaying Images by Shooting Date (Calendar
display)
Images will be grouped and displayed by shooting date.
7
Playback Functions

1

In the multi-image display
screen, press the M button.
The [Multi-img Display Setting] screen
appears.

2

Press the M button again.
The calendar display screen appears.
Only dates when pictures were taken
are displayed.

Number of images shot in this date2009. 9WED 23
FRI 25MON 282009. 10
THU
1
SUN
4
WED 7
SAT 102/5

DeleteShooting date

INFO

Thumbnail219

Available operations
Four-way controller (23)Four-way controller (45)
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y)M buttoni button3

Selects shooting date.
Selects an image of the selectedshooting date.
Displays the selected image. Turn to
the left (f) to return to calendar
display.
The camera returns to the multiimage display screen.
Deletes selected images.

Press the 4 button.
A full screen display of the selected image appears.

Joining Multiple Images (Index)
Join a number of saved images together and display them as an index
print. You can also save the displayed index print as a new image. You canselect the images to include in the index print and have them randomlyarranged.
7

Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select p (Index)
and press the 4 button.
The [Index] screen appears.

3
4

Press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select a layout and press the
4 button.
You can select o (Thumbnail),p (Square), q (Random1),r (Random2), s (Random3) orp (Bubble).

Index
LayoutImagesBackgrnd.
SelectCreate an image
MENU Cancel

OK OK

Playback Functions

1

220

5
6

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Images] andpress the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select the number of images
and press the 4 button.

Index
Layout12
ImagesBackgrnd. 24
36
SelectYou can select 12, 24 or 36 images.

Create an image
MENU Cancel

7
8

OK OK

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Backgrnd.]
and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select the background color
and press the 4 button.

Index
Layout12
ImagesBackgrnd.
SelectYou can select a white or black
background.

Create an image

7

MENU Cancel

Playback Functions

9

OK OK

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Select] andpress the four-way controller (5).

10 Use the four-way controller (23)to select the type of image
selection and press the 4
button.

Index
Layout12
ImagesBackgrnd.
SelectCreate an image
MENU Cancel

OK OK

221
u (All images)

Picks up images automatically from all of theimages saved.

w (Manual)

Individually select the images you want to include in
the index. Continue by selecting [Select image(s)]and selecting the individual images.

Picks up images automatically from the folder
x (Folder name) selected. Continue by selecting [Select a folder] andselecting the folder.

11 Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Create an image] andpress the 4 button.

Index
Layout12
ImagesBackgrnd.
Select

The index print is created and aconfirmation screen appears.

Create an image
MENU

12 Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save] or [Reshuffle]and press the 4 button.

7

MENU

OK OK

Save

The index image is saved as P and C file.

Reshuffle

Reselects the images included in the index and displays a
new index image. If [Thumbnail] is selected for [Layout],
this is not displayed.

After the index is saved, the camera returns to Playback mode and the index
image is displayed.
• Processing may take a while when creating an index print.
• When the number of saved images is smaller than the number set for [Images],
empty spaces will appear in [Thumbnail] layout and some images may be
duplicated in other layouts.
• The images are positioned in order starting from the smallest file number
when [Thumbnail] or [Square] is selected.

Playback Functions

Save
Reshuffle
CancelSlideshow222

You can play back all images saved on your SD Memory Card
successively.

Setting the Slideshow Display
Sets how images will be displayed during the Slideshow.

1

Press the 3 button in Playback mode.
The [Q Playback 1] menu appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Slideshow]
and press the four-way controller (5).
The screen to make the slideshow settings appears.

3
7

Use the four-way controller (23)to select the item you want tochange.
The following items can be changed.

Slideshow starts
Start

Playback Functions

Interval
Screen Effect
Repeat Playback

3sec.

MENU

Item

Description

OK OK

Setting

Interval

Select the image display
interval.

3 (default setting)/5/10/30
seconds

Screen Effect

Select the transition effectwhen the next image isdisplayed.

Off (default setting)/Fade/
Wipe/Stripe

RepeatPlayback

Set whether the slideshow
will start from the beginning
after the last image isdisplayed.

P (default setting)/O4

223
Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to change the setting.

Start
Interval
Screen Effect
Repeat Playback
MENU Cancel

3sec.
5sec.
10sec.
30sec.
OK OK

Starting the Slideshow

1

Select [Start] in Step 3 on p.222
and press the 4 button.
Or, select u (Slideshow) in the
playback mode palette and press
the 4 button.

Start

OK

The start screen is displayed andslideshow begins.
Available operations

7
Pauses playback. Press again to resume
playback.

Four-way controller (4)Four-way controller (5)Shows previous image.
Shows next image.

Four-way controller (3)Stops playback.

Playback Functions

4 button

224

2

Stop the slideshow.
Slideshow ends when one of the following operations is performed
during playback or when paused.
- The four-way controller (3) is pressed*1- The Q button is pressed*1- The 3 button is pressed*1- The shutter release button is pressed halfway or fully*2- The mode dial is turned*2- The = button is pressed*2- The main switch is turned to |*2*1 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to normal Playback mode.
*2 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to Capture mode.

For movies, only the first frame is displayed and then the next image isdisplayed after the set interval has elapsed. To play a movie during aslideshow, press the 4 button while the first frame is displayed. After themovie has finished playing, the slideshow will resume.

7
Playback Functions

Rotating Images

225

When pictures are taken with Q held vertically, the vertical position
sensor activates and rotation information is added to the image to enable
playback with the correct image orientation. You can change the rotation
information and save the image using the following procedure.
• The rotation information is not added when [33. Saving Rotation Info] in the[A Custom Setting 5] menu (p.87) is set to [Off].
• During playback, the image is automatically rotated based on the rotation
information when [34. Auto Image Rotation] in the [A Custom Setting 5]
menu (p.87) is set to [On].

1
2

Select the image you want to rotate in Playback mode.
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select s (Image
Rotation) and press the 4 button.
The selected image is rotated in 90° increments and the four thumbnail
images are displayed.

Playback Functions

4

7

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select the rotation
direction and press the 4
button.
The image rotation information is saved.
MENU Cancel

OK OK

Rotation information cannot be changed for the following cases.
- Protected images- Images without rotation information- When [34. Auto Image Rotation] in the [A Custom Setting 5] menu (p.87)
is set to [Off]Images with rotation information are displayed according to the orientation of
the camera.

Comparing Images

226

You can display two images side-by-side.

1

Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select g (Image
Comparison) and press the 4 button.
The last image displayed will be displayed twice side-by-side.

3

Select two images and comparethem at left and right.

100-0001x20

100-0001
x20

You can perform the following operations
while comparing the images.

MENU

OK

Available operations

7

4 button

Playback Functions

Four-way controller(2345)| (Green) button

4

Moves the selection frame to right image, both
images, and left image each time the button ispressed.
Moves area to enlarge. When the selection frame isplaced on both images, you can manipulate both
images at the same time.
Returns the enlarge display position to the center.

Front e-dial (R)When the selection frame is placed on the left or
right image, the previous or next image is displayed.

Rear e-dial (S)Enlarges or reduces the image. When the selection
frame is placed on both images, you can manipulate
both images at the same time.

M buttoni button

Switches information display On/Off.
When the selection frame is placed on the left or
right image, the selected image is deleted.

Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to the normal playback mode.

Deleting Multiple Images

227

Deleting Selected Images
You can delete multiple images in the multi-image display at once.
Deleted images cannot be restored.

• Protected images cannot be deleted.
• You can select up to 100 images at a time.

1

Turn the rear e-dial (S) to theleft (toward f) in Playbackmode.
The multi-image display screen appears.

7
Playback Functions

2

Press the i button.
The screen to select the images to delete
is displayed.
The screen temporarily changes to 36image display when [Multi-img Display
Setting] (p.217) is set to 81-image
display.

3

INFO

100-0001

Select the images to delete.

MENU

DeleteOK

228

Available operations

4

Four-way controller(2345)

Moves selection frame

4 button

Adds O and selects an image. Press again to
return to P. Protected images (Z) cannot be
selected.

Rear e-dial (S)Displays a full screen display of the image
selected with the selection frame. When theimage is displayed full screen, press the fourway controller (45) to display the previous or
next image.

Press the i button.
The delete confirmation screen appears.

5

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Select&Delete].
All selected images will
be deleted
Select&Delete
Cancel7

MENU

Playback Functions

6

Press the 4 button.
The selected images are deleted.

Deleting a Folder
You can delete the selected folder and all the images in it.

1Turn the rear e-dial (S) two
clicks to the left (toward f) in
Playback mode.
The folder display screen appears.

OK OK

2

229
Use the four-way controller(2345) to select a folder todelete and press the i button.

100

101

12345
102

The delete folder confirmation screen
appears.

103

104

105

100_0105

3

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Delete].

100 _ 0105
All images in selected
folder will be deleted
DeleteCancel
OK OK

4Press the 4 button.

3image(s)Protected images are found
Delete All
Leave All
OK OK

7
Playback Functions

The folder and all images in it are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when
there are protected images. Use the fourway controller (23) to select [Delete All]or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.
When [Delete All] is selected, protected
images are also deleted.

230

Deleting All Images
You can delete all saved images at once.
Deleted images cannot be restored.

1

Select [Delete All Images] in the [Q Playback 1] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The confirmation screen for deleting all images is displayed.

2

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Delete All Images].
All images are deleted
from memory
Delete All Images
Cancel
OK OK

7

3

Press the 4 button.

Playback Functions

All images are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when
there are protected images. Use the fourway controller (23) to select [Delete All]or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.
When [Delete All] is selected, protected
images are also deleted.

3image(s)Protected images are found
Delete All
Leave All
OK OK

Protecting Images from Deletion(Protect)231

You can protect images from being accidentally deleted.
Even protected images are deleted if the inserted SD Memory Card isformatted.

Protecting a Single Image

1

Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (2345) to selectZ (Protect) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the Protect setting method is displayed.

3

Use the four-way controller(23) to select [Single Image]and press the 4 button.

7
All Images

MENU

4
5

OK OK

Use the four-way controller (45) to select an image toprotect.
Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Protect].

100-0105

Select [Unprotect] to cancel the protect
settings.
Protect
Unprotect
MENU

OK OK

Playback Functions

Single Image

232

6

Press the 4 button.
The image is protected and the Y icon appears at the top right of thescreen.
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to protect other images.

Protecting All Images

1
2

Select [All Images] in Step 3 on p.231 and press the 4
button.
Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Protect] and press the
4 button.
All images saved on the SD Memory Card
are protected.
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the protect
setting on all of the images.

7

Protects all images

Protect
Unprotect
MENU

OK OK

Playback Functions

Connecting the Camera to AV
Equipment

233

You can connect the camera to a TV or other device with a video IN jackor HDMI terminal and play back images.
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of the AC
adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) is recommended. (p.47)• For AV equipment with multiple video IN jacks, check the operating manualof the AV device, and select the video IN jack to which the camera isconnected.
• You cannot output composite and HDMI video at the same time.
• You cannot adjust the volume on the camera when connected to an AV
device. Adjust the volume on the AV device.
• If you want to view a movie on an external monitor while recording it, connect
the camera to an AV device with an HDMI terminal. You cannot output amovie using the PC/AV terminal while recording.

Connecting the Camera to a Video IN JackUse the provided AV cable (I-AVC7) to connect the camera to a device
with a video IN jack.

3

7

Turn the AV device and camera off.
Open the terminal cover, face the arrow on the provided
AV cable toward the 2 mark on the camera, and connect
the cable to the PC/AV terminal.

Connect the other end of the AV cable to the video IN jackon the AV device.

Playback Functions

1
2

234

4

Turn the AV device and camera on.
The camera turns on in video mode, and the camera information isdisplayed on the screen of the connected AV device.
Even if you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo,monaural sound is played back.

Selecting the Video Output Format
When the hometown is set with the default setting (p.57), the video output
format is set in accordance with that region. Depending on the country or
region, images may fail to be played back with the default video output
format. If this happens, change the video output format setting.

1
2

Select [Video Out] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and press thefour-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller(23) to select [NTSC] or [PAL].

7
Playback Functions34

1 2 3 4Brightness LevelLCD Color Tuning
Video OutHDMI OutUSB Connection
Folder Name
File NameMENU Cancel

±0
NTSC
PAL
MSC
Date
IMGP
OK OK

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The video output format is set.
The video output format differs depending on the region. When you set [Setting
the Time] in the World Time setting (p.258) to X (Destination), the video output
setting changes to the video output format for that city.

235

Connecting the Camera to an HDMI Terminal
Use a commercially available HDMI cable to connect the camera to a
device with an HDMI terminal.

1
2Turn the AV device and camera off.
Open the terminal cover and connect the HDMI cable to
the HDMI terminal.

Çì

3Turn the AV device and camera on.
The camera turns on in HDMI mode, and the camera information isdisplayed on the screen of the connected AV device.
• The camera has a Type C (Mini) HDMI terminal. Use a commerciallyavailable HDMI cable that matches your AV device.
• Nothing is displayed on the camera monitor during HDMI output.
• If you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo, thesound is played back in stereo.

7
Playback Functions

4

Connect the other end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI IN
jack on the AV device.

236
Selecting the HDMI Output Format
Set the output signal format of the HDMI terminal.

1
2

Select [HDMI Out] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and press thefour-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller(23) to select the HDMI output
format.

Auto

The maximum size
corresponding the AV device
and camera is automaticallyselected. (default setting)

1080i

1920×1080i

720p

1280×720p

480p*1

720×480p

1 2 3 4Brightness LevelLCD Color Tuning
Video OutHDMI OutUSB Connection
Folder Name
File NameMENU Cancel

±0
NTSC
Auto
1080i
MSC
720p
480p
IMGP
OK OK

*1 When [480p] is selected, HDMI output format switches between 480p [NTSC] and576p (720×576p) [PAL] depending on the video output format setting.

7
Playback Functions

3
4

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The HDMI output format is set.
• When the HDMI output format is set to [1080i] or [720p], the display may
appear with a screen design that differs from that displayed on the camera.
• The Bright/Dark Area warning is not displayed during Live View.
• When the exposure mode is set to C (Movie), the output format is fixed to[480p] regardless of the HDMI output format setting.

8 Processing Images
This chapter describes how to process pictures taken andedit RAW images.

Changing the Image Size ...................................238
Processing Images with Digital Filters .............241
Developing RAW Images ...................................247
Readjusting Images Shot in JPEG Format ......252

Changing the Image Size238

Changes the number of recorded pixels and saves it as a new image.

Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels andQuality Level (Resize)
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level and saves it as a
new image. The number of recorded pixels can be reduced while stillobtaining an image with good quality.
• Only JPEG files captured with this camera can be resized.
• You cannot select a larger resolution than that of the original image.
• Images resized to m with this camera cannot be resized.

1
2

Select an image to resize in Playback mode.
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.

3
8

Use the four-way controller (2345) to selectn (Resize) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the recorded pixels and quality level appears.

Processing Images

4

Use the four-way controller(45) to select a size.
You can select one size smaller than thatof the original image. The selectable size
differs according to the original image
size and aspect ratio.

14M
MENU

5

10M
OK OK

Press the four-way controller (3) and use the four-way
controller (45) to select the quality level.
You can select Z, C, D or E.

6

239
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

7

Use the four-way controller(23) to select [Save as].

Saves the image as a new file

Save asCancel
MENU

8

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The resized image is saved as a new image.

Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping)Cuts out only the desired area of the picture and saves it as a new image.
The aspect ratio can also be changed.
• Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be cropped.
• Images resized to j or m with this camera cannot be cropped.

Select an image to crop in Playback mode.
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (2345) to selecto (Cropping) and press the 4 button.
The cropping frame to specify the size and position of the area to crop
appears on the screen.

8
Processing Images

1
2

240

4

Specify the size and position of
the area to crop by using
cropping frame.

MENU

OK

INFO

3:2

Available operations
Rear e-dial (S)Changes the size of the cropping frame.

Four-way controller(2345)
M button

Moves the cropping frame.
Changes the aspect ratio. Select from [3:2], [4:3],[16:9] or [1:1]. The image can also be rotatedfrom -45° to +45° in increments of 1°.

Aspect Ratio
Image Rotation

3:2
±0°

MENU

| (Green) button

8
Processing Images

5

Rotates the cropping frame in 90° increments.
| appears only when the size of the cropping
frame can be rotated.

Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

6

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save as].

Saves the image as a new file

Save asCancelMENU

7

Press the 4 button.
The cropped image is saved as a new image.

OK OK

Processing Images with Digital
Filters241

You can edit captured images using digital filters.
The following filters are available.
Filter name

EffectParameter

Toy Camera

Shading Level: +1/+2/+3
Creates an image thatlooks as though it was Blur: +1/+2/+3
shot with a toy camera. Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow

Retro

Toning: -3 to +3
Creates an image withthe look of an old photo. Frame Composite: None/Thin/Medium/
Thick

High Contrast

Enhances the contrast
in the image.

Extract Color

Extracts a specific color Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/and shoots the rest of Yellow
the image in black andColor Freq. Range: -2 to +2
white.

Soft

Creates an image with Soft Focus: +1/+2/+3
a soft focus throughout
Shadow Blur: On/Off
the image.

Star Burst

For taking pictures ofEffect Density: Small/Medium/Largenight scenes or lights
reflected on water witha special sparkling look Size: Short/Medium/Long
achieved by adding
cross-like effects to theAngle: 0°/30°/45°/60°
picture’s highlights.

Fish-eyeCreates an image thatlooks as though it wasshot with a fish-eye
lens.

Monochrome

Creates a monochrome Filter Effect: B&W/Red/Green/Blue
image such as a blackToning (B-A): 7 levels
and-white photo.

Color

Adds a color filter to the Color: Red/Magenta/Cyan/Blue/Green/
image. Select from 18 Yellow
filters (6 colors × 3
Color Density: Light/Standard/Dark
tones).

+1 to +5

Processing Images

Weak/Medium/Strong8242
Filter name

EffectParameter

Water Color

Creates an image thatlooks as though it waspainted.

PastelCreates an image thatlooks as though it was
drawn with a crayon.

Slim

Changes the horizontal
and vertical ratio of±8 levels
images.

Miniature

Blurs part of the image
to create a fake
Front/Middle/Backminiature scene.

HDR

Creates an image thatlooks like a highdynamic range image.

Intensity: Weak/Standard/Strong
Saturation: Low/Medium/High
Weak/Standard/Strong

Weak/Standard/Strong
Brightness: ±8 levels

Base
Parameter
Adj

Adjusts the parameters Saturation: ±3 levels
Hue: ±3 levels
to create the desired
image.
Contrast: ±3 levels
Sharpness: ±3 levels
High Contrast: Off/+1 to +5
Soft Focus: Off/+1/+2/+3
Tone Break: Off/Red/Green/Blue/
Yellow

8
Processing Images

Customize and save a
Custom Filter filter to your own
preferences.

Shading Type: 6 types
Shading Level: -3 to +3
Invert Color: Off/On
Distortion Type: 3 types
Distortion Level: Off/Weak/Medium/
StrongOnly JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be edited using theDigital Filters.

243

Applying the Digital Filter

1
2

Select an image for applying the digital filter in Playback
mode.
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select D (Digital
Filter) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the filter appears.

4

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select a filter andpress the 4 button.

100-0001
Toy Camera

After selecting a filter, you can check theeffects on the screen.
You can turn the front e-dial (R) to
select a different image.

5

MENU

Use the four-way controller (23) to select the parameterand the four-way controller (45) to adjust the value.
100-0001
Slim

MENU

OK

Color Filter

Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

MENU

OK

Slim Filter

8
Processing Images

100-0001
Color

6

OK OK

244

7

Use the four-way controller(23) to select [Uses filters incombination] or [Save as].
Select [Uses filters in combination] when
you want to apply additional filters to thesame image.

Continue selecting filters

Uses filters in combination
Save asCancel
MENU

8

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
If [Uses filters in combination] was selected, the camera will return toStep 4.
If [Save as] was selected, the filter-processed image will be saved as a newimage.
Up to 20 filters, including digital filters during shooting (p.153), can be
combined to the same image.

Recreating Filter Effects
Retrieves the setting of an image with filter effects and apply the same
filter effects to other images.
8
Processing Images

1
2
3

Select a filter-processed image in Playback mode.
Select [Digital Filter] in the playback mode palette.
Use the four-way controller(23) to select [Recreating filter
effects] and press the 4
button.
The history of the filter set for theselected image appears.

Applying the digital filter
Recreating filter effects
Searching for the original image
MENU

OK OK

4

245
To check the parameter details,
press the M button.

100-0001
Reapplies following digital filter
effects from previous image

You can check the filter parameters.
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
8.

MENU

5

9.
13.
10.
14.
11.
15.
12.
16.
INFO Details

17. - 18. - 19. - 20. - OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The image selection screen appears.

6

Use the four-way controller(45) to select an image for
applying the same filter effects
and press the 4 button.
You can only select an image that has notbeen processed with a filter.
The save confirmation screen appears.

7

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.

100-0001
Performs digital filter
processing to this image

MENU

OK OK

Saves the image as a new file

8
Save asCancelMENU

OK OK

Processing Images

The filter-processed image will be saved
as a new image.

246

Searching for the Original Image
Searches for and displays the original image prior to digital filter
application.

1

Select [Searching for the original
image] in Step 3 on p.244 andpress the 4 button.
The original image prior to digital filter
application is retrieved.

Applying the digital filter
Recreating filter effects
Searching for the original image
MENU

OK OK

If the original image is no longer stored on the SD Memory Card, the message[Original image, prior to digital filter application, is not found] appears.

8
Processing Images

Developing RAW Images

247

You can convert captured RAW files into JPEG or TIFF files.
Only RAW files captured with this camera can be edited. RAW files and JPEG
files captured with other cameras cannot be edited on this camera.

Developing One RAW Image

1
2

Select a RAW image in Playback mode.
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select h (RAW
Development) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the development method is displayed.

4

JPEG
Developing Single Image
Developing Selected Images

MENU

The parameters recorded in the image
file appear.
You can turn the front e-dial (R) to
select a different image.
To specify the parameters before
developing, see “Specifying theParameters” (p.250).

RAW

OK OK

JPEG

14M

File Format

MENU

OK

sRGB
100-0001

8
Processing Images

Use the four-way controller(23) to select [Developing
Single Image] and press the 4
button.

248

5

Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

6

Use the four-way controller(23) to select [Save as] andpress the 4 button.

RAW

JPEG

Saves the image as a new file

The RAW image is developed and saved
as a new image.

Save asCancelMENU

7

Use the four-way controller(23) to select [Exit] and press
the 4 button.

OK OK

Image developed and stored.
Continue developing?

Select [Continue] to edit other images.
Continue
Exit
OK OK

Developing Multiple RAW Images
8

You can develop multiple RAW images using the same settings.

Processing Images

1

Select [Developing Selected Images] in Step 4 on p.247
and press the 4 button.
The multi-image display screen appears.
Refer to p.216 for operations in the multi-image display screen.

2
3

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the RAW
images to be developed and press the 4 button.
Press the L button.
The development confirmation screen appears.

4249
Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Develop images asshot] or [Develop images withmodified settings].

Develop images as shot

To change the parameters, select[Develop images with modified settings].
For details, see “Specifying the
MENU
Parameters” (p.250).
The screen to select the parameter appears.

5

Set [File Format], [Recorded
Pixels] and [Quality Level].
You can select [JPEG] or [TIFF] for the
file format. If [TIFF] is selected, the[Recorded Pixels] and [Quality Level]settings are not available.

6

Develop images withmodified settings

OK OK

File Format
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level

MENU

OK

RAW

JPEG

14JPEGM
14M

sRGB
100-0001

Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

7

Use the four-way controller(23) to select [Save as] andpress the 4 button.

Saves the image as a new file

Save asCancelMENU

OK OK

Processing Images

The selected RAW images aredeveloped and saved as new images.

8

250

Specifying the Parameters
Specify the parameters for developing RAW images.
The following parameters can be changed.
Parameter

Value

File Format

JPEG/TIFF

Recorded Pixels*1

W (4672×3104)/J (3936×2624)/
P (3072×2048)/i (1728×1152)

p.186

Quality Level*1

Z (Premium) / C (Best) / D(Better) / E (Good)

p.187

Custom Image

Bright/Natural/Portrait/Landscape/Vibrant/
Muted/Monochromep.205

White Balance*2

F (Auto), G (Daylight), H (Shade),^ (Cloudy), JD (Fluorescent Light Daylight
Color), JN (Fluorescent Light Daylight
White), JW (Fluorescent Light Cool White),
JL (Fluorescent Light Warm White),
I (Tungsten Light), L (Flash), f,
K (Manual), K (Color Temperature)

p.191

Sensitivity-2.0 to +2.0

High-ISO Noise
Reduction

Off/Low/Medium/High

p.92

Shadow Correction

8

Page
–

–

Processing Images

Off/Low/Medium/High

p.199

*3

Off/Onp.201

Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj*3

Off/Onp.201

Color Space

sRGB/AdobeRGB

p.279

Distortion Correction*1 This cannot be set when [File Format] is set to [TIFF]. (The setting is fixed to W.)*2 This cannot be set for RAW files taken in Multi-exposure mode.
*3 This can be selected only when a compatible lens is attached. (p.201)

1

Press the four-way controller(23) in Step 4 on p.247 tochoose the parameter you want
to change.

RAW

JPEG

14M

File Format

MENU

OK

sRGB
100-0001

2

251
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the value.
Use the four-way controller (5) to display the setting screen for White
Balance and Custom Image.

3

Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

4

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as] andpress the 4 button.
The RAW image is developed and saved as a new image.
• You cannot save the background image or use Digital Preview with White
Balance/Custom Image.
• When the white balance is set to K (Manual), press the m button to display
the measuring screen.

8
Processing Images

Readjusting Images Shot in JPEG
Format252

You can readjust Custom Image and White Balance for images shot in
JPEG format immediately after shooting them without deteriorating image
quality.

1

Set the file format to [JPEG] and shoot an image.
Refer to p.188 for setting File Format.

2

Press the four-way controller (4) to change White
Balance, or press the four-way controller (5) to change
Custom Image.
The [White Balance] or [Custom Image] screen appears.

3

Set White Balance or Custom Image as desired.
Custom Image or White Balance can be set using the same proceduresas before shooting.
Refer to p.191 for setting White Balance and p.205 for setting Custom
Image.

4

Press the L button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

8
Processing Images

5

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as] andpress the 4 button.
The image with the White Balance or Custom Image setting is saved asa new image.
The image can be readjusted only right after being shot. Adjustments cannot
be made after new images are shot or the camera is turned off.

9 Changing Additional
Settings

This chapter describes how to change additional settings.

How to Operate the Set-up Menu ......................254
Formatting the SD Memory Card ......................256
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and Display
Language ............................................................257
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display ..262
Setting the Folder Name/File Number Naming
Convention ..........................................................267
Setting the Power Setting ..................................270
Setting the DPOF Settings .................................273
Setting USB Connection Mode .........................275
Setting the Photographer Information Saved to
Exif .......................................................................277
Setting the Color Space......................................279
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS Sensor(Pixel Mapping) ...................................................280
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera (Memory)..............................................................................281

254

How to Operate the Set-up Menu
Perform various settings related to the camera in the [R Set-up] menu.
Refer to “Using the Menus” (p.36) for details on menu operations.

Set-up Menu Setting Items
Perform the following settings in the [R Set-up 1-4] menu.
Press the 3 button in Capture/Playback mode and use the four-way
controller (45) to display the [R Set-up 1-4] menu.
Menu

Item

Function

Page

Changes the language in which menus
and messages appear.

p.261

Date Adjustment

Sets the date format and time.

p.258

World Time

Sets display of local date and time of a
specified city in addition to the present
location on the monitor when travelingoverseas.

p.258

Text Size

Sets the size of the text selected in themenus.

p.262

Guide Display

Sets to display indicators on themonitor.

p.262

Beep

Switches the beep tone on/off.

p.257

Brightness Level

Changes the brightness of the monitor.

p.264

LCD Color Tuning

Adjusts the color of the monitor.

p.265

Video Out

Sets the output format when connecting
to an AV device with a video jack.

p.234

HDMI Out

Sets the HDMI output format whenconnecting to an AV device with an
HDMI terminal.

p.236

USB Connection

Sets the USB connection mode whenconnecting to a computer.

p.275

Folder Name

Sets the method used to assign folder
names for storing images.

p.267

File Name

Sets the method used to assign filenames for images.

p.268

Language/

R1

9Changing Additional Settings

R2

255
Menu

Item

Function

Page

Copyright Information

Sets the photographer and copyrightinformation embedded to Exif.

p.277

Auto Power Off

Sets the time to turn off automatically.

p.270

Select Battery

Sets the battery to use when theoptional battery grip (D-BG4) is
attached.

p.270

Reset

Resets all settings.

p.290

Pixel Mapping

Maps out and corrects for any defective
pixels in the CMOS sensor.

p.280

Dust Alert

Detects dust adhering to the CMOS
sensor.

p.296

Dust Removal

Cleans the CMOS sensor using
ultrasonic vibrations.

p.295

Sensor Cleaning

Locks the mirror in the up position forcleaning the CMOS sensor.

p.297

FormatFormats the SD Memory Card.

p.256

R3

R4

[R Set-up 1] menu

[R Set-up 2] menu

1 2 3 41 2 3 4

EnglishDate Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Guide Display
BeepStandard
3sec.

MENU Exit

±0
NTSC
Auto
MSC
Date
IMGP

[R Set-up 4] menu

1 2 3 41 2 3 4

Copyright Information
Auto Power Off
1min.
Select Battery
Reset

Pixel Mapping
Dust Alert
Dust Removal
Sensor Cleaning
FormatMENU Exit

MENU Exit

9
Changing Additional Settings[R Set-up 3] menu

Brightness LevelLCD Color Tuning
Video OutHDMI OutUSB Connection
Folder Name
File NameMENU ExitFormatting the SD Memory Card256

Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unusedor has been used on other cameras or digital devices.
Formatting will delete all the data on the SD Memory Card.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may bedamaged and become unusable.
• Note that formatting will delete all data, either protected or unprotected.

1

Select [Format] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press thefour-way controller (5).
The [Format] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Format].

FormatAll data deleted

FormatCancel
OK OK

3
9Press the 4 button.

Changing Additional Settings

Formatting starts.
When formatting is completed, thescreen that was displayed before
selecting the menu appears again.

Formatting

Setting the Beep, Date and Time, andDisplay Language

257

Setting the Beep
You can turn the camera operation beep on or off.
There are five items that you can set: In-focus, AE lock, | button
operation sound, self-timer and remote control.
The default setting is all O (On).

1

Select [Beep] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press the fourway controller (5).
The [Beep] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller(23) to select an item and use
the four-way controller (45) toselect O or P.
You can turn all the beeps off by selecting
Z for [Setting].

Beep
Setting
In-focus
AE-L
RAW
Self-timer
Remote Control
MENU

3

Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9
Changing Additional Settings

258

Changing the Date Display
You can change the initial date and time settings. You can also set thedisplay style. Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd].
Choose [12h] (12 hour) or [24h] (24 hour) for time display method.
Set in [Date Adjustment] in the [R Set-up 1]
Date Adjustment
menu (p.254).
Date Format
mm/dd/yy 24h
1 Setting the Date and Time (p.61)
Date

01 / 01 / 2009Time

00 : 00
Settings complete

MENU Cancel

Setting the World Time
The date and time set in “Initial Settings” (p.57) serve as the date and timeof your present location.
Setting the destination in [World Time] enables you to display the local
date and time on the monitor when traveling overseas.

1

Select [World Time] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [World Time] screen appears.

92Changing Additional Settings

Use the four-way controller (45)to select X (Destination) or W
(Hometown) for [Setting theTime].

Setting the Time
Destination
London16 : 00

This setting changes the date and time on
the guide display screen.

Hometown
New York

10 : 00

World Time

MENU

3

259
Press the four-way controller (23).
The selection frame moves to X (Destination setting).

4

Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Destination] screen appears.

5

Use the four-way controller(45) to select a destination city.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to change themap.
The location, time difference and current
time of the selected city appears.

6
7

Destination

LondonDSTMENU Cancel+06:00
16:00
OK OK

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [DST].
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Select O (On) if the destination city uses daylight saving time (DST).

8

Press the 4 button.
The destination setting is saved.

9

Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9
Changing Additional Settings• Refer to “List of World Time Cities” (p.260) for cities that can be specified asa destination.
• Select W (Hometown) in Step 2 to select the city and DST setting.
• X appears in the guide display and status screen if [Setting the Time] is set
to X (Destination). (p.22)• When you set [Setting the Time] to X (Destination), the video output (p.234)
setting changes to the default setting for that city.

260
List of World Time Cities
RegionNorth
America

Central andSouthAmerica

Europe9
Changing Additional Settings

City
Honolulu
Anchorage
Vancouver
San Francisco
Los Angeles
Calgary
Denver
Chicago
Miami
Toronto
New York
Halifax
Mexico City
Lima
Santiago
CaracasBuenos Aires
Sao Paulo
Rio de Janeiro
LisbonMadridLondonParis
Amsterdam
Milan
Rome
Copenhagen
BerlinPragueStockholm
Budapest
Warsaw
AthensHelsinki
Moscow

RegionAfrica/West
Asia

East Asia

City
Dakar
Algiers
Johannesburg
Istanbul
Cairo
Jerusalem
Nairobi
JeddahTehranDubai
Karachi
Kabul
Male
Delhi
Colombo
Kathmandu
Dacca
YangonBangkok
Kuala Lumpur
Vientiane
Singapore
Phnom Penh
Ho chi Minh
JakartaHong Kong
BeijingShanghai
ManilaTaipei
Seoul
Tokyo
Guam

261
RegionOceaniaCity
PerthAdelaide
SydneyNoumeaWellington
Auckland
Pago Pago

Setting the Display Language
You can change the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.
are displayed.
You can choose from 20 languages: English, French, German, Spanish,Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,
Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Chinese (Traditional/
Simplified) and Japanese.
Set in [Language/] in the [R Set-up 1]
menu (p.254).
1 Setting the Display Language (p.57)

MENU Cancel

OK OK

9
Changing Additional Settings

262

Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu
Display
Setting the Text Size
You can set the size of the text selected in the menus to [Standard](normal display) or [Large] (magnified display).
Set in [Text Size] in the [R Set-up 1] menu
1 2 3 4(p.254).
EnglishDate Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Guide Display
Beep
MENU Cancel

Standard
Large
MSC

OK OK

Setting the Guide Display Time
Set the length of time that the guides are displayed on the monitor when
the camera is turned on or the Capture mode is changed. (p.22)
Select from [3sec.] (default setting), [10sec.], [30sec.] and [Off].
Set in [Guide Display] in the [R Set-up 1]
1 2 3 4
menu (p.254).
English9

Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Guide Display
Beep

Changing Additional Settings

MENU Cancel

3sec.
10sec.
MSC
30sec.
Off
OK OK

Setting the Status Screen Display
You can set whether to display the status screen on the monitor and set
the display color of the status screen, control panel and playback mode
palette.

1

263
Select [Status Screen] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [Status Screen] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
O:
P:

3
4

Displays status screen (default setting).
Does not display status screen.

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Display Color].
Use the four-way controller (45)to select from the six display
colors.

Status Screen
Status Screen
Display Color1

1/ 125

F 5.6
MENU

5

Press the 3 button twice.
The status screen display and display color settings are changed.

Setting the Display for Instant Review

1

Select [Instant Review] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [Instant Review] screen appears.

9
Changing Additional Settings

You can set the Instant Review display time and whether or not to display
the histogram and Bright/Dark Area warning. The default settings are[1sec.] for the [Display Time] and [Off] for [Histogram] and [Bright/DarkArea].

264

2

Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to select the display timefor [Instant Review].

Instant Review
Display Time
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area

MENU Cancel

3
4
5
6

1sec.
3sec.
5sec.
Off

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Histogram] or[Bright/Dark Area].
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor
You can adjust the brightness of the monitor. Adjust settings when themonitor is hard to see.

9

1

Select [Brightness Level] in the [R Set-up 2] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).

Changing Additional Settings

The [Brightness Level] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (45)to adjust the brightness.

Brightness Level

You can adjust the value from the 15
levels.

±0

MENU Cancel

3

Press the 4 button.

OK OK

4

265
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Adjusting the Color of the Monitor
You can adjust the color of the monitor.

1

Select [LCD Color Tuning] in the [R Set-up 2] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [LCD Color Tuning] screen appears.

2

Adjust the color.
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available
on the G-M and B-A axes.

LCD Color Tuning
G
B

±0

±0

MENU Cancel

A
M

±0

OK OK

Available operations
Four-way controller (23)Four-way controller (45)
| (Green) button

3
4

Displays a saved image in the backgroundso you can adjust the color while viewing
the image. This is useful for matching thecolor of the monitor with that of a computer.

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9
Changing Additional Settings

Front e-dial (R)Adjusts the tone of the colors between
green (G) and magenta (M).
Adjusts the tone of the colors between
blue (B) and amber (A).
Resets the adjustment value.

266

Setting the Electronic Level Display
This camera is equipped with an electronic level for detecting whether thecamera is level, as indicated on the bar graph in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel. Select whether to display the bar graph.

1
2

Select [Electronic Level] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu.
Use the four-way controller (45)to select O or P.
O:
P:

3

Displays the bar graph of theelectronic level
Does not display the bar graph ofthe electronic level (default
setting)

1 2 3 4

Movie
Live View
Status Screen
Digital Preview
Instant Review
Electronic Level
Horizon Correction
MENU Exit

Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
The bar graph is also displayed on the LCD panel during Live View. (p.159)

9
Changing Additional Settings

Setting the Folder Name/File Number
Naming Convention

267

Selecting the Folder NameYou can select a method for assigning the folder names for storing
images.

Date

The two digits of the [month] and [day] on which the picture was taken
are assigned as the folder name in the form of [xxx_MMDD]. [xxx] is asequential number from 100 to 999. [MMDD] (month and day) appears
according to the date format set in [Date Adjustment] (p.258). (default
setting)
Example: 101_0125: for folders with pictures taken on January 25thPENTX

The folder name is assigned in the form of [xxxPENTX].
Example: 101PENTX

Set in [Folder Name] in the [R Set-up 2]
menu (p.254).

1 2 3 4Brightness LevelLCD Color Tuning
Video OutHDMI OutUSB Connection
Folder Name
File NameMENU Cancel

±0
NTSC
Auto
MSC
Date
PENTX
IMGP
OK OK

Selecting the File Number SettingO

The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is saved
and subsequent images are assigned sequential file numbers even if a
new folder is created.

P

The file number of the first image saved to a folder returns to 0001 eachtime a new folder is created for saving images.
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are
divided into folders of 500 images each. However, in Auto Bracket shooting,images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed, even if thenumber of images exceeds 500.

9Changing Additional Settings

You can select a method for assigning the file number of an image when
saved to a new folder. Select O or P for [File No.] in [Memory] (p.281) inthe [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.

268

Setting the File NameYou can change the file names of images.
The default naming conventions for the color space (p.279) settings are as
follows.
[xxxx] indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential
number. (p.267)
Color Space

File NamesRGB

IMGPxxxx.JPG

AdobeRGB_IGPxxxx.JPG

For sRGB, you can change [IMGP] (4 characters) to the desired
characters.
For AdobeRGB, of the 4 characters you selected, the first 3 are assigned
in place of [IGP].
Example: When set to [ABCDxxxx.JPG], files are named[_ABCxxxx.JPG] for AdobeRGB

1

Select [File Name] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and press thefour-way controller (5).
The [File Name] screen appears.

2
9

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Change] and press thefour-way controller (5).
The text-entry screen appears.

File NamesRGB
AdobeRGBI M G P xxxx.jpg_ I G P xxxx.jpg

Changing Additional Settings

ChangeReset File Name
MENU

3

Change the text.
Text selection
cursorFile Name

FinishText input
cursorMENU Cancel

OK Enter

269

Available operations
Rear e-dial (S)Four-way controller(2345)
4 button

4

Moves text input cursor.
Moves text selection cursor.
Enters a character selected with the text selection
cursor at the position of the text input cursor.

After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to[Finish] and press the 4 button.
The file name is changed.

5

Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Resetting the File NameYou can reset a changed file name to its default setting.

1

Select [Reset File Name] in Step 2 on p.268 and press the
4 button.
The file name is reset.

2

Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9
Changing Additional Settings

Setting the Power Setting

270

Setting Auto Power Off
You can set the camera to turn off automatically if unused after a certain
length of time. Select from [1min.] (default setting), [3min.], [5min.],[10min.], [30min.] or [Off].
Set in [Auto Power Off] in the [R Set-up 3]
1 2 3 4
menu (p.255).
Copyright Information
Auto Power Off
Select Battery
Reset

MENU Cancel

1min.
3min.
5min.
10min.
30min.
Off
OK OK

Auto Power Off function does not work in the following situations.
- The Live View is displayed- The slideshow is played back- The camera is connected to a computer with the USB cable

Selecting a Battery
9

You can set the battery priority to the camera or the battery grip when theoptional battery grip D-BG4 (p.299) is attached.

Changing Additional Settings

1

Select [Select Battery] in the [R Set-up 3] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Select Battery] screen appears.

2

271
Press the four-way controller(5).

Select Battery
Auto Select

MENU

3

Use the four-way controller (23)to select an item.

Select Battery
Auto SelectBody First
Grip FirstMENU Cancel

4
5

OK OK

Auto SelectPriority is given to the battery with the most remaining
power. (default setting)

Body First/
Grip First

Priority is given to the selected battery.

Press the 4 button.
Select Battery
Auto SelectAA Battery Type

MENU

AUTO

9
Changing Additional Settings

When using AA batteries in thebattery grip, use the four-way
controller (23) to select [AABattery Type] and press the fourway controller (5).

272

6

Use the four-way controller (23)to select the AA battery type.
When set to [Auto-detect], the camera willdetect automatically the type of battery
used.

Select Battery
AUTO
AA Battery Type
AUTO Auto-detect
Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride
AL AlkalineLi
Lithium

MENU Cancel

7
8

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
• If batteries are inserted into both the body and grip, the battery levels of bothare checked when the power is turned on. Regardless of the [Select Battery]
setting, both batteries are slightly used.
• When the currently selected battery runs out as a result of the check, [Battery
depleted] appears on the monitor. Turn the camera off and on again, and thecamera will switch to the remaining battery.
• You can check the battery usage condition on the status screen and LCD
panel. (p.46)

9

When the type of AA batteries inserted in the battery grip differs from thebattery type setting in Step 6, the battery level will not be correctly determined.
Please set the correct battery type. Usually, there is no problem using[Auto-detect]. However, when using batteries at low temperature, or whenusing batteries that were stored for long periods of time, set the appropriate
battery type so the camera can correctly determine the remaining battery level.

Changing Additional Settings

Setting the DPOF Settings

273

You can order conventional photograph prints by taking the SD Memory
Card with recorded images to a store for printing.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) settings allow you to specify the
number of copies and whether to imprint the date.
• DPOF settings cannot be applied to RAW images.
• You can make DPOF settings for up to 999 images.

1

Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select r (DPOF)
and press the 4 button.
The screen to select how to change the settings is displayed.

3

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Single Image] or [AllImages] and press the 4
button.

Single ImageAll Images

MENU

4

OK OK

9
100-0105

Copies

MENU

5

00

Date

Date

OK OK

Use the four-way controller (23) to select the number ofcopies.
You can print up to 99 copies.

Changing Additional Settings

When [Single Image] is selectedin Step 3, use the four-way
controller (45) to select animage to set DPOF settings.

274

6

Turn the rear e-dial (S) to
select O or P for printing thedate.
O: The date will be printed.
P : The date will not be printed.
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to set other images(up to 999).

7

100-0105

Copies

MENU

00

Date

Date

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The DPOF setting for the selected image is saved and the camera
returns to Playback mode.
• Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab,the date may not be printed on the pictures even if the DPOF setting is set toO.
• The number of copies specified in settings for all images applies to all theimages and the settings for single images are canceled. Before printing,check that the number is correct.
To cancel DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00] in Step 5 and press
the 4 button.

9
Changing Additional Settings

Setting USB Connection Mode275

Set the USB connection mode when connecting to a computer via theprovided USB cable (I-USB7). The default setting is [MSC].

1
2

3

Select [USB Connection] in the [R Set-up 2] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select [MSC] or [PTP].

1 2 3 4Brightness LevelLCD Color Tuning
Video OutHDMI OutUSB Connection
Folder Name
File NameMENU Cancel

±0
NTSC
Auto
MSC
PTP
IMGP
OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The setting is changed.

4

Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9
Changing Additional Settings

276
MSC and PTP
MSC (Mass Storage Class)
A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected tothe computer via USB as a memory device. Also indicates a standard
for controlling USB devices with this driver.
By simply connecting a device that supports USB Mass Storage
Class, you can copy, read, and write files from a computer without
installing a dedicated driver.
PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol)
A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital
cameras via USB, standardized as ISO 15740.
You can transfer image data between devices that support PTP
without installing a device driver.
Unless otherwise specified, select MSC when connecting the Q
to your computer.

9
Changing Additional Settings

Setting the Photographer Information
Saved to Exif

277

The camera type, shooting conditions and other information areautomatically embedded in captured images in the Exif data format. You
can embed photographer information in this Exif.
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software to check the Exif
information.

1

Select [Copyright Information] in the [R Set-up 3] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Copyright Information] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller(45) to select O or P.
O:
P:

3

Embeds copyright information in
the Exif.
Does not embed copyrightinformation in the Exif. (default
setting)

Copyright Information
Embed Copyright Data
Photographer
Copyright Holder

MENU

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Photographer]and press the four-way controller (5).
The text-entry screen appears.

4Enter the text.

FinishText input
cursorDelete One Character
MENU Cancel

OK Enter

Changing Additional Settings

Text selection
cursor9

Photographer

278

Available operations

5

Rear e-dial (S)Four-way controller(2345)| (Green) button

Moves text input cursor.
Moves text selection cursor.

4 button

Enters a character selected with the text
selection cursor at the position of the text input
cursor.

i button

Deletes a character at the position of the text
input cursor.

Switches between upper and lower case letters.

After entering the text, move thetext selection cursor to [Finish]and press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Copyright
Information] screen.

Copyright Information
Embed Copyright Data
Photographer
AAAA
Copyright Holder

MENU

6
7

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [CopyrightHolder] and enter the text in the same way as[Photographer].
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9
Changing Additional Settings

Setting the Color Space

279

You can set the color space to use.
sRGB

Sets to sRGB color space. (default setting)

AdobeRGB

Sets to AdobeRGB color space.

Set in [Color Space] in the [A Rec. Mode 4]
menu (p.84).

1 2 3 4

Color SpaceRAW File Format
RAW Button
MemoryUSER
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
MENU CancelsRGB
AdobeRGB

OK OK

File names differ depending on the color space setting as shown below.
For sRGB: IMGPxxxx.JPG
For AdobeRGB : _IGPxxxx.JPG“xxxx” indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential
number. (p.267)

Color Space

9
Changing Additional Settings

Color ranges for various input/output devices, such as digital
cameras, monitors, and printers, differ. This color range is called theColor Space.
To recreate different color spaces in different devices, standard color
spaces have been proposed. This camera supports sRGB and
AdobeRGB.
sRGB is mainly used for devices such as a computer.
AdobeRGB covers a wider range of color than sRGB and is used for
occupational uses such as industrial printing.
An image created in AdobeRGB may appear lighter than an image
created in sRGB when output from an sRGB compatible device.

Correcting Defective Pixels in the
CMOS Sensor (Pixel Mapping)280

Pixel mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting for defective
pixels in the CMOS sensor.

1

Select [Pixel Mapping] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Pixel Mapping] andpress the 4 button.
Defective pixels are mapped andcorrected, and the screen that was
displayed before selecting the menu
appears again.

Pixel Mapping
Checks the image sensor
and then adjust
Pixel Mapping
CancelOK OK

When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to activate
Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Use the AC adapter kit K-AC50(optional) or change the battery with ample power remaining.

9
Changing Additional Settings

Selecting Settings to Save in the
Camera (Memory)281

You can select which function settings to save when the camera is turned
off. The following function settings can be saved.
• Flash Mode
• Drive Mode
• White Balance• Sensitivity• EV Compensation• Flash Exposure Compensation• Extended Bracketing• HDR Capture• Digital Filter• Playback Display• File number

The default setting is O (On) for all except HDR Capture and Digital Filter.
[Memory] cannot be selected when the mode dial is set to A.

1

Select [Memory] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Memory 1] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (23)to choose an item.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the[Memory 2] screen.

Memory

1 2

MENU

3

Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
O:P:

Settings are saved even when the camera is turned off.
Settings are cleared and returned to their default settings when
the camera is turned off.

9
Changing Additional Settings

Flash Mode
Drive Mode
White Balance
Sensitivity
EV Compensation
Flash Exposure Comp.
Extended Bracketing

282

4

Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
• Set [File No.] to O (On) to continue the sequential numbering for the filename even if a new folder is created. See “Selecting the File Number Setting”(p.267).
• When the [R Set-up] menu is reset (p.290), all Memory settings return to thedefault settings.

9
Changing Additional Settings

10Appendix
Default Settings ..................................................284
Functions Available with Various Lens
Combinations .....................................................292
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor ...............................295
Optional Accessories .........................................299
Error Messages ..................................................305
Troubleshooting .................................................307
Main Specifications ............................................309
Glossary ..............................................................314
Index ....................................................................319
WARRANTY POLICY ..........................................326

284

Default Settings
The table below lists the factory default settings.
The functions set in Memory (p.281) are saved even when the camera isturned off.
Reset Setting
Yes : The setting returns to the default setting with the reset function(p.290).
No : The setting is saved even after reset.
Direct Keys
Item

Default Setting

Reset
Setting

Page

Drive Mode

9 (Single Frame
Shooting)

Yes

p.143
p.136
p.138
p.148
p.141

Flash Mode

Depends on Capture
mode

Yes

p.72

White Balance

F (Auto)

Yes

p.191

Custom Image

BrightYes

p.205

Default Setting

Reset
SettingPage[A Rec. Mode] Menu
Item
Exposure Mode*1

10
Appendixe (Hyper-program)

Yes

p.209

JPEG

Yes

p.188

W (4672×3104)

Yes

p.186

C (Best)

Yes

p.187

Sensitivity limit

100 - 800

Yes

AUTO ISO
Parameterss (Standard)

Yes

File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
ISO AUTO
Setting
D-Range
Setting

Highlight Correction

P (Off)Yes

Shadow Correction

Off

Yes

Lens
Correction

Distortion Correction

P (Off)Yes

Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj

P (Off)

Yes

p.90

p.199
p.201

285
Item
Program Line

Default Setting

Reset
SettingPage
p.94

k (Normal)

Yes

Type

Off

Yes

Bracketing Amount

±1

Yes

HDR Capture

Off

Yes

p.200

Digital Filter

Not use any filters

Yes

p.153

Number of Shots

2timesYes

Auto EV Adjustment

P (Off)Yes

Interval

1sec.

Yes

Extended
Bracketing

Multiexposure

Interval
Shooting

Number of Shots

2 images

Yes

Start Interval

Now

Yes

Start Time

12:00AM / 00:00

Yes

Center

Yes

0°

Yes

Composition X-Y direction
Adjust.
RotateRecorded Pixels

X

Yes

C (Best)

Yes

Sound

O (On)

Yes

Movie Aperture
Control

Fixed

Yes

Quality Level
Movie

Live View

DigitalPreview

Instant
Reviewl (Off)Yes

O (On)

Yes

Show Grid

P (Off)P (Off)P (Off)Yes

Histogram
Bright/Dark Area

Yes
Yes

Autofocus ModeI (Face Detection +Contrast AF)

Yes

Status Screen

O (On)

Yes

Display Color

1

Yes

Digital Preview

Off (Optical Preview)Yes

P (Off)P (Off)Yes

Bright/Dark Area
Display Time

1sec.

Yes

Histogram

P (Off)P (Off)Yes

Histogram

Bright/Dark Area

p.146

p.144

p.203

p.160

p.157

10
p.262

p.129

Yes

Yes

p.263

Appendix

StatusScreenShake Reduction
Info Overlay

p.151

286
Item

Default Setting

Reset
SettingPage

P (Off)P (Off)

Yes

p.266

Horizon Correction

Yes

p.133

Color Space

sRGB

Yes

p.279

RAW File Format

PEF

Yes

p.189

O (On)Yes

All RAW+

Yes

Electronic Level

Cancel after 1 shot
RAW Button JPEG/RAW/RAW+ File
FormatO (On) for all except

Memoryp.189

HDR Capture andDigital Filter

Yes

p.281

—

Yes*2

p.207

Shake Reductionk (On)

Yes

p.133

Input Focal Length

35 mm

Yes

p.135

USER

*1 Appears only when the mode dial is set to A.
*2 The saved settings are reset only for [Reset USER Settings] in the [USER] screen.

Playback Mode Palette
Default Setting

Reset
Setting

Page

Slideshow

—

Yes

p.223

Image Comparison

—

—

p.226

Toy Camera

Yes*3

p.241

ResizeMaximum size
according to the setting

—

p.238

Cropping

Maximum size
according to the setting

—

p.239

Item

Digital Filter

10
Appendix

Protect

—

No

p.231

DPOF

—

No

p.273

Index

—

—

p.219

File Format: JPEG
Recorded Pixels: W
Quality Level: C

Yes

p.247

Image Rotation

—

—

p.225

Save as Manual WB

—

—

p.198

RAW Development*3 The filter parameter settings can be saved or reset.

287[Q Playback] Menu
Item

Default Setting

Reset
Setting

Interval

3sec.

Yes

Screen Effect

Off

Yes

P (Off)P (Off)

Yes

Off

Yes

—

—

p.230

Default Setting

Reset
Setting

Page

Language/

According to default
settingNo

p.261

Date Adjustment

According to default
settingNo

p.258

Setting the TimeW (Hometown)

Yes

Destination (City)

Same as Hometown

No

Destination (DST)Same as Hometown

No

Hometown (City)

According to default
setting

No

Hometown (DST)

According to default
setting

No

According to default
setting

No

p.262

3sec.

Yes

p.262

All O (On)

Yes

p.257

10
Appendix

Slideshow

Repeat Playback
Playback
Display
MethodBright/Dark Area
Quick Zoom

Delete All Images

Yes

Page

p.222

p.215

[R Set-up] Menu
Item

World Time

Text Size
Guide Display
Beep

p.258

Brightness Level

±0

Yes

p.264

LCD Color Tuning

±0

Yes

p.265

Video OutAccording to default
settingNo

p.234

HDMI Out

Auto

Yes

p.236

USB Connection

MSC

Yes

p.275

Folder Name

Date

Yes

p.267

File Name

IMGP/_IGP

No*4

p.268

288
Item

Default Setting

Reset
Setting

Page

Copyright Information

P (Off)No

p.277

Auto Power Off

1min.

Yes

p.270

Select Battery

Auto SelectYes

AA Battery Type

Auto-detect

Yes

Reset

—

—

p.290

Pixel Mapping

—

—

p.280

Dust Alert

—

—

p.296

Dust Removal——

Start-up Action

O (On)

Yes

Sensor Cleaning

—

—

p.297

Format

—

—

p.256

Default Setting

Reset
Setting

Page

1. EV Steps

1/3 EV Steps

Yes

p.116

2. Sensitivity Steps

SelectBattery

Dust
Removal

p.270

p.295

*4 Reset only for [Reset File Name] in the [File Name] screen.

[A Custom Setting] Menu
Item

10

1 EV Step

Yes

p.90

3. Expanded Sensitivity

Off

Yes

p.90

4. Meter Operating Time

10sec.

Yes

p.114

Appendix

5. AE-L with AF Locked

Off

Yes

p.126

6. Link AE to AF Point

Off

Yes

p.114

7. One-Push Bracketing

Off

Yes

p.150

8. Auto Bracketing Order

0-+

Yes

p.148

9. Auto EV Compensation

Off

Yes

—

10. WB When Using Flash

Auto White Balance

Yes

p.192

11. WB Adjustable Range

Auto Adjustment

Yes

p.192

12. AWB in Tungsten Light

Subtle Correction

Yes—

13. AF Button Function

Enable AF

Yes

p.120

14. AF with Press Halfway

On

Yes

—

15. Superimpose AF Area

On

Yes

p.122

16. AF with Remote Control

Off

Yes

p.140

17. Remote Control in Bulb

Mode1

Yes

p.111

289
Item

Default Setting

Reset
Setting

Page

18. Slow Shutter Speed NR

On

Yes

p.92

19. High-ISO Noise Reduction

MediumYes

p.92

20. High-ISO NR Start Level

ISO 800

Yes

p.92

21. Color Temperature Steps

KelvinYes

p.196

22. e-dial in Program

Front: b Rear: c

Yes

p.97

23. e-dial in Sv mode

Front: -

Yes

p.99

24. e-dial in Tv mode

Front: b Rear: -

Yes

p.101

25. e-dial in Av mode

Front: -Rear: c

Yes

p.103

26. e-dial in TAv & M modes

Front: b Rear: c

Yes

p.106

27. e-dial in B & X modes

Front: -

Yes

p.111

Rear: oRear: c28. Green Button in TAv & M

Program Line

Yes

p.106

29. LCD Panel Illumination

On

Yes

p.33

30. Release While Charging

Off

Yes

p.77

31. Flash in Wireless Mode

On

Yes

p.177

32. AF Assist Light

On

Yes

—

33. Saving Rotation Info

On

Yes

p.225

34. Auto Image Rotation

On

Yes

p.225

35. Catch-in Focus

Off

Yes

p.128

36. AF Adjustment

Off

Yes*5

p.121

37. Using Aperture Ring

Prohibited

Yes

p.294

Reset Custom Functions

—

—

p.290

*5 The saved adjustment value is reset only for [Reset] in the [36. AF Adjustment] screen.

10
Appendix

290

Resetting the Menu
Resetting Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up Menu
Settings in [A Rec. Mode] menu, [Q Playback] menu, [R Set-up] menu,
direct keys and playback mode palette can be reset to default settings.
Language/, Date Adjustment, the city and DST settings for World Time,
Text Size, Video Output, Copyright Information and [A Custom Setting] menu
settings are not reset.
Reset function is not available when the mode dial is set to A.

1

Select [Reset] in the [R Set-up 3] menu and press the fourway controller (5).
The [Reset] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.

Reset
Returns to default settings

The settings are reset, and the screenthat was displayed before selecting themenu appears again.

Reset
CancelOK OK

Resetting the Custom Menu
10

Reset settings in [A Custom Setting] menu to default settings.

Appendix

1

Select [Reset Custom Functions] in the [A Custom
Setting 6] menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Reset Custom Functions] screen appears.

2

291
Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
The settings are reset, and the screenthat was displayed before selecting themenu appears again.

Reset Custom Functions
Returns the custom function
settings to default values
Reset
CancelOK OK

10Appendix292

Functions Available with Various
Lens Combinations
Only DA, DA L and FA J lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses having an s
(Auto) position on the aperture ring can be used with factory default
settings. Refer to “Notes on [37. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.294) for otherlenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses with aperture ring set to a position otherthan s.
z : Functions are available when the aperture ring is set to the s position.
# : Some functions are restricted.
× : Functions are unavailable.
FA J
FA*6

F*6

A

M
P

[KAF]
[KAF2]

[KAF]

[KA]

[K]

Function[KAF][KAF2][KAF3]

Autofocus(Lens only)(With AF adapter 1.7×)*1

z
–

z
–

z
–

–
#*8

–
z

Manual focus(With the focus indicator)*2(With matte field)

z
z

z
z

z
z

z
z

z
z

Quick-Shift Focus System

#*5

×

×

×

×
×

Eleven AF points

z

z

z

#*8

Multi-segment metering

z

z

z

z

×

e (Hyper-program) mode

z

z

z

z

#*9

K (Sensitivity Priority) mode

z

z

z

z

#*9

b (Shutter Priority) mode

z

z

z

z

#*9

10

c (Aperture Priority) mode

z

z

z

z

#*9

AppendixLens DA[Mount type] DA L
D FA

L (Shutter & Aperture Priority) mode

z

z

z

z

#*9

a (Hyper-manual) mode

z

z

z

z

#

P-TTL Auto Flash*3

z

z

z

z

×

Power Zoom

–

z*7

–

–

–

Automatic obtaining the lens focal length
information when using the Shake
Reduction function

z

z

z

×

×

Lens Correction function*4

z

×

×

×

×

*1 Lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or brighter. Only available at s position.
*2 Lenses with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or brighter.
*3 When using the built-in flash and AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or AF160FC.
*4 Aberration correction is available in [Lens Correction] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu. The[Distortion Correction] setting is disabled when using the DA 10-17mm FISH-EYE lens.
*5 Only available with compatible lenses.
*6 To use an F/FA SOFT 85 mm f/2.8 lens or FA SOFT 28 mm f/2.8 lens, set [37. Using
Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting 6] menu to [Permitted]. Pictures can be takenwith the aperture you set, but only within manual aperture range.
*7 Only available with KAF2 mount FA lenses.
*8 The AF point is fixed to U (Center).
*9 c (Aperture Priority) Automatic Exposure with the aperture open. (Adjusting the aperturering has no effect on the actual aperture value.)293

Lens names and mount names
DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and FA zoom lenses with power zoom
use the KAF2 mount. DA lenses with ultrasonic motor and no AF coupler
use the KAF3 mount.
FA prime lenses (non-zoom lenses), DA and DA L lenses without
ultrasonic motors and D FA, FA J and F lenses use the KAF mount.
See the lens manual for details.

Lenses and accessories that cannot be used with this camera
When the aperture ring is set to other than the s (Auto) position or a lens
without an s position or accessories such as an auto extension tube or
auto bellows are used, the camera does not operate unless [37. Using
Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting 6] menu is set to [Permitted].
Refer to “Notes on [37. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.294) for restriction that
apply.
All camera exposure modes are available when using DA/DA L/FA J or
lenses with an Aperture s position set to the s position.

The built-in flash cannot be regulated and fully discharges when A lenses
not set to the s (Auto) position, pre A lenses or soft focus lenses are used.
Note that the built-in flash cannot be used as an Auto Flash.

10
AppendixLens and Built-in Flash294

Notes on [37. Using Aperture Ring]
When [37. Using Aperture Ring] in the[A Custom Setting 6] menu is set to[Permitted], the shutter can be released
even if the aperture ring of the D FA, FA, F or
A lens is not set to the s (Auto) position or alens without an s position is attached.
However, the features will be restricted asshown below.

37. Using Aperture Ring
1 Prohibited
2 Permitted

Shutter will release whenaperture ring is not set to the"A" position

Restrictions on using lenses with aperture ring set to a position other than s
Lens Used
D FA, FA, F, A, M (lensonly or with auto
diaphragm accessories
such as auto extension
tube K)

Exposure Mode

Restriction

The aperture remains open regardlessof the aperture ring position. The
c (Aperture shutter speed changes in relation to theopen aperture but an exposure error
Priority)
may occur. In the viewfinder, [F--]appears for the aperture indicator.

D FA, FA, F, A, M, S
(with diaphragm
accessories such as
extension tube K)c (Aperture Pictures can be taken with thePriority)
specified aperture value but an
exposure error may occur. In the
viewfinder, [F--] appears for the
Manual diaphragm lensc (Aperture aperture indicator.
such as reflex lens (lensPriority)
only)

FA, F SOFT 85mm FA
SOFT 28mm (lens only)

10
Appendix

All lenses

Pictures can be taken with thespecified aperture value in the manual
aperture range. In the viewfinder, [F--]c (Apertureappears for the aperture indicator.
Priority)
When depth of field is checked (OpticalPreview), exposure metering starts.
Exposure check is possible.

a (Hypermanual)

Pictures can be taken with the set
aperture value and shutter speed. In
the viewfinder, [F--] appears for theaperture indicator.
When depth of field is checked (OpticalPreview), exposure metering starts.
Exposure check is possible.

The camera operates in c (Aperture Priority) mode even if the mode dial is at
B, e, K, b or L when the aperture is set to the position other than s.

Cleaning the CMOS Sensor

295

Shadows may appear in the image for white backgrounds and othershooting conditions if the CMOS sensor becomes dirty or dusty. This
indicates that the CMOS sensor must be cleaned.

Removing Dust with Ultrasonic Vibrations(Dust Removal)
Dust adhering to the CMOS sensor is removed by applying ultrasonicvibrations to the filter on the front surface of the CMOS sensor for
approximately one second.

1

Select [Dust Removal] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Dust Removal] screen appears.

2

Press the 4 button.

Dust Removal

The Dust Removal function is activated.
Dust Removal
Start-up Action
Set [Start-up Action] to O (On) to turn the
Dust Removal function on every time thecamera is turned on. Use the four-way
controller (45) to set to P (Off) if you do
not want the function to be activated
MENU
when the camera is turned on.
When the Dust Removal function iscompleted, the camera returns to the [R Set-up 4] menu.

OK Start

10
Appendix296

Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor (Dust
Alert)
Dust Alert is a function that detects dust adhering to the CMOS sensor andvisually displays the location of the dust.
You can save the detected image and display it when performing sensor
cleaning (p.297).
The following conditions must be met before using the Dust Alert function:• A DA, DA L, FA J lens or a D FA, FA and F lens that has an Apertures (Auto) position is attached.
• The aperture is set to the s position when using a lens with anaperture ring.
• Set the mode dial to any mode other than C (Movie).
• Set the focus mode lever to l or A.

1

Select [Dust Alert] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press thefour-way controller (5).
The [Dust Alert] screen appears.

2

10

Fully display a white wall or
uniformly bright subject in the
viewfinder and press the shutter
release button fully.
After image processing is performed, the[Dust Alert] screen appears.
If [The operation could not be completed
correctly] is displayed, press the 4
button and take another picture.

Appendix3

Dust Alert
Checks for dust on the sensor.
Press shutter release button
to reveal dust location

MENU

SHUTTER Check

Press the 4 button.
The image is saved and the camera
return to the [R Set-up 4] menu.

x1

OK Exit297• The exposure time may be extremely long when using the Dust Alert
function. Note that if the direction of the lens is changed before processing iscomplete, dust will not be detected properly.
• Depending on the subject conditions or temperature, dust may not be
detected properly.
• The Dust Alert image can only be displayed during sensor cleaning within 30
minutes from the time the image is saved. If 30 minutes elapse, save a new
Dust Alert image and then perform sensor cleaning.
• The saved Dust Alert image cannot be displayed in Playback mode.
• Dust Alert image cannot be saved when an SD Memory Card is not inserted.
• Regardless of the camera settings, Dust Alert image will be taken withspecific shooting conditions.
• Press the M button or turn the rear e-dial (S) when displaying the Dust
Alert image to view it at full screen display.

Removing Dust with a Blower
Raise the mirror up and open the shutter to clean with a blower.
Please contact PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning
because the CMOS sensor is a precision part. Cleaning services involvea fee.
You can use the optional Imagesensor Cleaning Kit O-ICK1 (p.303) whencleaning the CMOS sensor.

10
Appendix• Do not use a spray type blower.
• Do not clean the sensor when the mode dial is set to p.
• Always cap the lens mount area to prevent dirt and dust from accumulatingon the CMOS sensor when no lens is on the camera.
• When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to clean
sensor] is displayed on the monitor.
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when cleaning
the sensor. If you are not using the AC adapter kit K-AC50, please use abattery with ample capacity remaining. If the battery capacity becomes low
during cleaning, a warning beep will sound. Please stop cleaning
immediately.
• Do not put the tip of the blower inside the lens mount area. If the power isturned off, this could cause damage to the shutter, CMOS sensor or the
mirror.

298• The self-timer lamp blinks and [Cln] appears on the LCD panel while cleaning
the sensor.
• The camera may generate a vibration sound while cleaning the CMOS
sensor. It is not a malfunction.

1
2
3Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
Turn the camera on.
Select [Sensor Cleaning] in the [R Set-up 4] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [Sensor Cleaning] screen appears.

4

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Mirror Up] and press
the 4 button.
The mirror is locked in the up position.
If you used the Dust Alert function to
detect dust on the sensor within the last
30 minutes, the Dust Alert image appearson the monitor. It allows you to clean thesensor while checking the location of the
dust.

5

Sensor Cleaning
Raises mirror and open shutter
for access to clean sensor.
Turn the power off to finish
Mirror Up
CancelClean the CMOS sensor.
Use a brush-less blower to remove dirt
and dust from the CMOS sensor. Using a
blower with a brush may scratch the
CMOS sensor. Do not wipe the CMOS
sensor with a cloth.

10
Appendix

6
7

Turn off the camera.
Attach the lens after the mirror returns to its original
position.

OK OK

Optional Accessories

299

A number of dedicated accessories are available for this camera. Pleasecontact a PENTAX Service Center for details regarding accessories.
Products marked with an asterisk (*) are the same as those supplied withthe camera.

Power Supply Accessories
Battery Charger kit K-BC90 (*)(Set includes Battery charger D-BC90 and AC plug cord.)
Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI90 (*)
AC Adapter kit K-AC50(Set includes AC Adapter D-AC50 and AC plug cord.)
Lets you power your camera with the outlet when combined with the ACplug cord.
Battery Grip D-BG4
The Battery Grip has features such as a
shutter release button, front e-dial, reare-dial, and L button toaccommodate shooting vertically. In
addition to the rechargeable lithium-ion
battery D-LI90, AA lithium/Ni-MH/
alkaline batteries can also be used in
the battery grip to power the camera.
The AC adapter and battery charger are only sold as a set.

10
Appendix

300
Flash Accessories
Auto Flash AF540FGZ
Auto Flash AF360FGZ
The AF540FGZ and AF360FGZ are PTTL auto flash units with a maximum
guide number of approximately 54 and
36 (ISO 100/m), respectively. Theirfeatures include slave-sync flash,contrast-control-sync flash, auto flash,high-speed sync flash, wireless flash,slow-speed sync and trailing curtainsync flash.

AF540FGZ

AF360FGZ

Auto Flash AF200FG
The AF200FG is a P-TTL auto flash unit
with a maximum guide number ofapproximately 20 (ISO 100/m). It
features contrast-control-sync flash andslow-speed sync flash when combinedwith the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ unit.

10
Appendix

Auto Macro Flash AF160FC
The AF160FC is a flash systemespecially designed for macro
photography to take close, shadowless
pictures of small objects. It is compatible
with existing TTL auto flash functions
and it can be used with a wide range of
PENTAX cameras by using the provided
adapter ring.

AF200FG

AF160FC

301
Hot Shoe Adapter FG
Extension Cord F5P
Hot Shoe Adapter FG

Off-camera Shoe Adapter F
Use the adapters and cords to use theexternal flash away from the camera.

Off-camera Shoe Adapter F

Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10
When using the AF540FGZ or
AF360FGZ as a wireless flash, thislarge clip is used for setting the external
flash on a desk or table.

Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10

For Viewfinder

Magnifier FBThis viewfinder accessory is for
magnifying the central area of the
viewfinder 2×.
You can see the entire view by simply
flipping up the accessory from the eyepiece, as it is a hinge-type magnifier.

Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53

10
AppendixMagnifier Eyecup O-ME53
This viewfinder accessory is for
magnifying up to approximately 1.18
times.
When the eyecup is attached to the
Q with a viewfinder magnification of
approximately 0.92 times, the combined
magnification becomes approximately
1.09 times, making manual focusingmuch easier.

Magnifier FB

302

Ref-converter A
This is an accessory that changes the
viewfinder viewing angle at 90°
intervals. The viewfinder magnification
can be switched between 1× and 2×.

Ref-converter A

Diopter correction lens adapter M
This accessory adjusts the diopter.
Install it on the viewfinder.
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder
image clearly, choose one of the eightcorrection of approximately -5 to +3m-1(per meter).

Diopter correction lens adapter M

ME Viewfinder Cap (*)
Eyecup FP (*)

Interchangeable Focusing Screen
AF Frame Matte MF-60 (*)

M60

10Appendix

AF Scale Matte MI-60

M60

AF Divided Matte ML-60

M60

Plain Matte ME-60

M60

303
Cable Switch CS-205
Connect to the cable release terminaland operate the camera shutter releasebutton. The cord length is 0.5 m.

Remote Control F
Used for remote control shooting.
Operating distance for remote control
From the front of camera: approx. 4 m
From the back of camera:approx. 2 m

Camera Case/Strap
Camera Case O-CC90
Camera Strap O-ST53 (*)

Imagesensor Cleaning Kit O-ICK1
Clean the optical parts such as the
CMOS sensor and lens of this camera.

10
Appendix

304
OthersBody Mount Cap K
Hot Shoe Cover FK (*)
USB Cable I-USB7 (*)
AV cable I-AVC7 (*)
Sync Socket 2P Cap (*)

10
AppendixError Messages

305

Error Message

Description

Memory card full

The SD Memory Card is full and no more images
can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory Card ordelete unwanted images. (p.49, p.79)
Data may be saved when you perform thefollowing operations.
• Change the file format to [JPEG]. (p.188)• Change the JPEG Recorded Pixels or JPEG
Quality setting. (p.186, p.187)

No image

There are no images for playback on the SD
Memory Card.

This image cannot be
displayed

You are trying to play back an image in a format
not supported by this camera. You may be able toplay it back on another brand of camera or on yourcomputer.

No card in the camera

The SD Memory Card is not inserted in thecamera. (p.49)

Memory card error

The SD Memory Card has a problem, and image
capture and playback are impossible. It may beviewable on a PC but not with this camera.

Card is not formatted

The SD Memory Card you have inserted isunformatted or has been formatted on other device
and is not compatible with this camera. Use thecard after formatting it with this camera. (p.256)

Card is locked

The write-protect switch on the SD Memory Card
you have inserted is locked. Unlock the SD
Memory Card. (p.50)
Data are protected by the SD Memory Card
security feature.

This image cannot be
enlarged

You are trying to enlarge an image that cannot be
enlarged.

This image is protected

You are trying to delete an image that is protected.
Remove protection from the image. (p.231)

Battery depleted

The battery is exhausted. Install a charged battery
in the camera. (p.43)

Not enough battery
power remaining toclean sensor

Appears during sensor cleaning if the battery levelis insufficient. Replace the battery with a fully
charged one or use an AC adaptor kit K-AC50(optional). (p.47)

10
Appendix

The card iselectronically locked306
Error Message

Description

Not enough battery
power remaining toactivate Pixel Mapping

Appears during pixel mapping if the battery level isinsufficient. Replace the battery with a fully
charged one or use an AC adaptor kit K-AC50(optional). (p.47)

Image folder cannot becreatedThe maximum folder number (999) and filenumber (9999) are being used, and no more
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory
Card or format the card. (p.256)

Unable to store image

The image could not be saved because of an SD
Memory Card error.

Settings not stored

The DPOF settings or rotation information could
not be saved because SD Memory Card is full.
Delete unwanted images and perform DPOF
settings or rotation again. (p.79)

The camera was unable to measure the manual
The operation could not be
white balance or detect dust on the sensor. Try thecompleted correctly
operation again. (p.194, p.296)
No more images can beselected

You cannot select 100 or more images at a time forIndex (p.219), Select & Delete (p.227) and
Developing Selected Images (p.248).

This image cannot beprocessed

Appears when Save as Manual WB (p.198),
Resize (p.238), Cropping (p.239), Digital Filter(p.241), or RAW Development (p.247) is started
for images captured with other cameras, or when
Resize or Cropping is started for minimum size
images.

The camera failed to create
The creation of an index print image failed. (p.219)
an image

10
Appendix

Camera overheated.
Disabling Live View
temporarily
to protect circuitry

Live View cannot be used because the camera’sinternal temperature is too high. Press the 4
button and try using Live View again when thecamera has cooled down.

This function is
not available inthe current mode

You are trying to set a function that is not available
in B (Green) or C (Movie) mode.

Troubleshooting

307

In rare cases, the camera may not operate correctly due to static
electricity. This can be remedied by taking the battery out and putting themback in again. When the mirror remains in the up position, take the battery
out and put them back in again. Then, turn the power on. The mirror will
retract. After these procedures are done, if the camera operates correctly,
it does not require any repairs.
We recommend checking the following items before contacting a service
center.
Problem

Cause

The battery is not
The camera installed
does notThe battery power isturn onlow
The lens aperturering setting is otherthan the s position
The shutter
does notreleaseCheck if a battery is installed. If not, install acharged battery.
Replace with charged battery or use the AC
adapter kit K-AC50 (optional). (p.47)
Set the lens aperture ring to the s position(p.95) or select [Permitted] in [37. Using
Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting 6]
menu. (p.294)

The flash is charging Wait until charging is finished.
There is no available Insert an SD Memory Card with available
space on the SD
space or delete unwanted images. (p.49,
Memory Card
p.79)
RecordingWait until recording is finished.

The subject isdifficult to focus on

Autofocus cannot focus well on subjects
that have low contrast (the sky, white walls),
dark colors, intricate designs, rapidlymoving objects or scenery shot through awindow or a net-like pattern. Lock focus on
another object located at the same distanceas your subject, then aim at target and press
the shutter release button fully.
Alternatively, use manual focus. (p.126)

Position the subject in the focus frame in the
middle of the viewfinder. If the subject is
The subject is not in outside the focusing area, aim the camera
the focusing areaat the subject and lock the focus, thencompose a picture and press the shutter
release button fully. (p.124)
The subject is too
closeMove away from the subject and take apicture.

10
AppendixThe
autofocus
does notwork

Remedy308
ProblemThe
autofocus
does not
work

Cause

RemedyThe focus mode is
set to \Set the focus mode lever to l or A.
(p.118)The focus mode is
set to k

Autofocus is not locked (focus lock) when
the focus mode is set to k (A). The
camera will continue focusing on the subject
while the shutter release button is pressedhalfway. If there is a subject that you wish to
focus on, slide the focus mode lever to l
and use the focus lock. (p.124)

AE lockfunction
does notoperateSet the exposure mode to any mode otherAE lock is notavailable when set
than B (Green), p (Bulb) or M (Flash Xto B, p or M mode. sync Speed).

The flashdoes notdischarge

Only C (Auto Flash Discharge) and D(Auto Flash+Red-eye Reduction) areavailable for the flash mode when the
exposure mode is B (Green). The flash will
The exposure mode
not discharge when the subject is bright inis set to B modethese modes. In the exposure modes otherthan B, only the flash mode thatdischarges every time the flash recharges isavailable. Try different exposure modes.

The USB
connection
with acomputerdoes notwork
properly

Set [USB Connection] in the [R Set-up 2]
menu to [MSC]. (p.275)
The USB connection
Refer to the provided “Quick Guide” formode is set to [PTP]
details on connecting the camera to acomputer.

10
Appendix

Shake
Reduction
does notwork

The Shake
Reduction function
is offSet [Shake Reduction] in the [A Rec. Mode4] menu to k (On). (p.132)

The Shake
Reduction function
is not set properly

If a lens for which focal length information
cannot be obtained is used, set [Focal
Length] in the [Input Focal Length] menu.
(p.135)

Shutter speed is too
low for the Shake
Reduction function Turn off the Shake Reduction function andto be effective when use a tripod.
panning or shootingnight scenes, etc.
The subject is too
closeMove away from the subject, or turn off the
Shake Reduction function and use a tripod.

Main Specifications

309

Type

TTL autofocus, auto-exposure SLR digital-still camera withbuilt-in retractable P-TTL flash

Effective Pixels

Approx. 14.6 megapixels

Image Sensor

Total pixels approx. 15.07 megapixels, CMOS with a primarycolor filter

Recorded Pixels

W (RAW: 4672×3104 pixels), W (JPEG: 4672×3104
pixels), J (3936×2624 pixels), P (3072×2048 pixels), i(1728×1152 pixels)

Sensitivity (Standard
output sensitivity)

Auto, ISO 100 to 3200 (Standard output sensitivity) (EV steps
can be set to 1 EV, 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV), ISO 6400 is available
with the custom function setting, up to ISO 1600 is available
during p

File Format

RAW (PEF/DNG), JPEG (Exif 2.21), DCF 2.0 compliant,
DPOF compatible, Print Image Matching III compatible,
RAW+JPEG simultaneous capturing compatible, Movie: AVI

JPEG Quality

Z (Premium), C (Best), D (Better), and E (Good)

Storage Medium

SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card

Approximate Number of Storable Images

Recorded
PixelsW
4672×3104
W
4672×3104

P
3072×2048| (DNG)
Z
C
D
E
Z
C
D
E
Z
C
D
E

SD Memory Card capacity

2 GB
82

1 GB 512 MB 256 MB 128 MB
40
20
10
5

161
292

82
148

40
73

20
36

10
18

5
9

467
826

238
420

117
206

58
103

29
52

15
26

1630
409

830
208

408
102

204
51

102
25

52
13

652
1149

332
585

163
289

81
144

41
72

21
37

2234
666

1138
339

564
167

282
83

142
42

73
21

1068
1856

543
945

267
468

133
234

67
118

34
60

3549

1807

902

450

227

116

10
AppendixJ
3936×2624

File Format/
JPEG Quality 4 GB
162
| (PEF)

310
Recorded
Pixelsi1728×1152

SD Memory Card capacity

File Format/
JPEG Quality 4 GB
2045
Z

2 GB
1041

1 GB 512 MB 256 MB 128 MB
516
258
130
66

3176
5485

1617
2793

805
1373

402
686

203
346

104
177

10057

5121

2518

1258

634

325

C
D
E

JPEG Quality (Compression): Z (Premium) = 1/2.8, C (Best) = 1/4.5, D (Better)= 1/8, E (Good) = 1/16
• The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting conditions,shooting mode and SD Memory Card, etc.

Approximate Movie Recording Time

Recorded
Pixels

QualityC

F
1536×1024

D
E
C

X
1280×720

DE
C

Y
640×41610DESD Memory Card capacity

Appendix

4 GB
2 GB
1 GB 512 MB 256 MB 128 MB
7 min. 3 min. 1 min.
55 sec. 28 sec. 14 sec.
23 sec. 45 sec. 51 sec.
10 min. 5 min. 2 min. 1 min.
39 sec. 20 sec.
22 sec. 16 sec. 36 sec. 18 sec.
14 min. 7 min. 3 min. 1 min.
55 sec. 28 sec.
40 sec. 28 sec. 40 sec. 50 sec.
9 min. 4 min. 2 min. 1 min.
35 sec. 18 sec.
26 sec. 48 sec. 21 sec. 10 sec.
13 min. 6 min. 3 min. 1 min.
50 sec. 25 sec.
19 sec. 47 sec. 20 sec. 40 sec.
18 min. 9 min. 4 min. 2 min. 1 min.
36 sec.
37 sec. 29 sec. 41 sec. 20 sec. 10 sec.
31 min. 16 min. 7 min. 3 min. 2 min. 1 min.
55 sec. 15 sec. 59 sec. 59 sec. 00 sec. 01 sec.
44 min. 22 min. 11 min. 5 min. 2 min. 1 min.
41 sec. 45 sec. 11 sec. 35 sec. 49 sec. 26 sec.
1 hr.
31 min. 15 min. 7 min. 3 min. 2 min.
00 min.
02 sec. 29 sec. 44 sec. 54 sec. 00 sec.
57 sec.

• Movie recording time is based on our measuring conditions. The above figures may varydepending on the subject, shooting conditions and SD Memory Card, etc.

White BalanceAuto, Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Fluorescent Light (D: Daylight Color,
N: Daylight White, W: Cool White, L: Warm White), Tungsten Light,
Flash, CTE, Manual, Color Temperature (3 types), fine tuning
available

Monitor

3.0-inch wide viewing field TFT color LCD with approx. 921,000 dots,brightness and color adjustment functions

311

Exposure
Mode

A, B Green, e Hyper-program, K Sensitivity priority, b
Shutter priority, c Aperture priority, L Shutter & Aperture priority,a Hyper-manual, p Bulb, M Flash X-sync Speed, C Movie

Shutter

Electronically controlled vertical-run focal-plane shutter, Speed
range (1) Auto 1/8000 to 30 sec. (stepless), (2) Manual 1/8000 to 30
sec. (1/2 EV steps or 1/3 EV steps), Bulb, Electromagnetic release,
Shutter lock by setting main switch in OFF position

Lens Mount

PENTAX KAF2 bayonet mount (AF coupler, lens information contacts,
K-mount with power contacts)

Lens UsedPENTAX KAF3 mount lenses, KAF2 mount lenses, KAF mount lenses,
KA mount lenses

Autofocus
System

TTL phase-matching autofocus system (SAFOX VIII+), AF
operational brightness range: EV -1 to 18 (at ISO 100 with f/1.4 lens),
Focus lock available, Focus Mode: l (Single)/k(Continuous)/\, Adjustable AF point

Viewfinder

Pentaprism Finder, Interchangeable Natural-Bright-Matte III focusing
screen, Field of view: approx. 100%, Magnification: approx. 0.92×(with 50 mm f/1.4 lens at ∞), Diopter: approx. -2.5m-1 to +1.5m-1(per meter)

Viewfinder
Indication

Focus information: ] is lit when in-focus and blinking when unable
to focus, b is lit = Built-in flash ready, b is blinking = Flash should
be used or incompatible lens is being used, Shutter speed, Confirm
Sensitivity, Aperture value, e-dial enabled indicator, @ = AE lock,Remaining capacity, m = EV compensation/Exposure Bracketing,N = Flash exposure compensation, \ = Manual focus,
k = Shake Reduction display, V = Multi-exposure,
M = Metering method, V = Change AF point, EV bar, Electronic
Level, RAW/RAW+LCD Panel
Displayb is lit = Built-in flash ready, b is blinking = Flash should be used or
incompatible lens is being used, 3 = Auto flash discharge,>=Red-eye reduction, Q = Slow-speed sync, E = Trailing
Curtain Sync, 9 = Single frame shooting, j = Continuous shooting,g = Self-timer, W = Remote control shooting, ? = Battery
exhaustion warning, N = Flash exposure compensation, Confirm
sensitivity, Shutter speed, Aperture value, Remaining capacity,m = EV compensation, Pc-S (mass storage)/Pc-P (PTP) appears
when the USB cable is connected, EV bar, Electronic Level, 1,
1P
Live View:

Preview
Function

TTL method using the image sensor, Zoom Display
and Show Grid are usable
Optical Preview: Depth of field confirmation (electronically controlled
and usable in all exposure modes)
Digital Preview: Composition, exposure, focus and white balance
confirmation

10
Appendix

Playback
Function

Single frame, multi-image display, zoom display (up to 32 times,
scrolling possible), image comparison, rotating, calendar display,folder display, slideshow, histogram, bright/dark area, resize,
cropping, index (Thumbnail/Square/Random1/Random2/Random3/
Bubble)312
Up to approx. 5.2 fps, JPEG: up to 40 frames (Hi) / until SD Memory
Continuous
Card is full (Lo), RAW: up to 15 frames (PEF, Hi) / up to 14 frames
Shooting (Hi/Lo)(DNG, Hi)
Self-timer

Electronically controlled with delay time of 12 sec./2 sec. (with mirror
lock-up function). Start by pressing the shutter release button.
Operation confirmation: Possible to set beep. Can be cancelled after
operation

Remote Control

PENTAX Remote Control F (optional) Release shutter immediately
or three seconds after pressing the remote control shutter releasebuttonMirrorQuick-return mirror, mirror lock-up function

Digital Filter

Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Soft, Star Burst,
Fish-eye, Monochrome, Color, Water Color, Pastel, Slim, Miniature,
HDR, Base Parameter Adj, Custom Filter

Custom Image

Image Tone (7 types), Saturation, Hue, Contrast, Sharpness/Fine
Sharpness, High/Low Key Adj, Filter Effect, Toning

Exposure
Bracketing

Three or five frames (underexposed, proper exposure andoverexposed) are shot continuously with exposure bracketing.
(Selectable between 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV for EV steps)

Extended
Bracketing

Three frames are saved continuously with white balance, saturation,hue, high/low key adjustment, contrast and sharpness bracketing.

Multi-exposure

Select the number of shots between 2 and 9 (Auto EV Adjustment
can be set according to the number of shots)

TTL multi (77-segment metering), Exposure range from EV 0 to EV
Exposure Meter/
22 at ISO 100, with 50 mm f/1.4 lens, Center-weighted and Spot
Exposure Range
metering mode can be set
EV
Compensation±5 levels, EV Steps can be selected

AE Lock

Button type (timer type: two times the meter operating time set inCustom Function) Continuous as long as the shutter button is
halfway pressed.

Built-in FlashP-TTL built-in flash with serial control, GN approx. 13 (ISO 100 • m),
Angles of coverage: 18 mm lens angle of view, Flash synchronization
speed range at 1/180 sec. and slower, Daylight-sync flash, Slowspeed-sync flash, ISO range = P-TTL: 100 to 6400

External FlashSync

Hot shoe with M-contact, which couples with PENTAX dedicatedauto flashes, ISO range = P-TTL: 100 to 1600, Automatic flash, Redeye reduction flash function, High-speed flash sync and wirelesssync with PENTAX dedicated flash

10
Appendix

Custom Function 37 functions can be set
Time Function

World Time settings for 75 cities (28 time zones)

Shake Reduction Image Sensor Shift, effective compensation range = up to 4 EV
Function(dependent on the used lens type and shooting conditions)
Dust Removal

Ultrasonic vibrations for dust removal. Can be set to operate when
the camera is turned on.

313
Power

Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI90, AC adapter kit K-AC50(optional)
Number of recordable images: approx. 980 images (without flash)*1/
approx. 740 images (50% flash usage)*2, playback time: approx. 440
minutes*1

Battery Life
(23°C)*1 The number of recordable images (without flash) and playback time
are based on our measuring conditions. Some deviation from theabove figures may occur in actual use depending on usage conditions.
*2 The number of recordable images (50% flash usage) is based on
measuring conditions in accordance with CIPA standards. Some
deviation from the above figures may occur in actual use dependingon usage conditions.

Battery
Exhaustion

Battery exhaustion indicator ? is lit. (The shutter is locked and no
indication appears in the viewfinder when ? starts blinking.)

In/Out Port

PC/AV terminal (USB 2.0 (high speed compatible)), mini HDMI
terminal, DC input terminal, Cable release terminal, Microphone
terminal, X-sync socket

Video Output
Format

NTSC/PAL

Approx. 130.5 mm (W) × 96.5 mm (H) × 72.5 mm (D) (excluding
Dimensions and protrusions)
Weight
670 g (body only), 750 g (including a battery and an SD Memory
Card)

Accessories

Hot shoe cover FK, Eyecup FR, ME viewfinder cap, Sync socket 2P
cap, Body mount cover, USB Cable I-USB7, AV cable I-AVC7,
Software (CD-ROM) S-SW90 (PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4),
Strap O-ST53, Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI90, Battery
charger D-BC90, AC plug cord, Operating Manual (this book), Quick
Guide

Languages

English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch,
Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Turkish, Greek,
Russian, Korean, Chinese (Traditional/Simplified) and Japanese

10
Appendix314

Glossary
AdobeRGB
Color space recommended by Adobe Systems, Inc. for commercial
printing. Wider range of color reproduction than sRGB. Covers most of thecolor range so colors only available when printed are not lost when editing
images on a computer. When image is opened by non-compatible
software, the colors look lighter.
Aperture
The aperture increases or reduces the light beam (thickness) passing
through the lens to the CMOS sensor.
Auto Bracket
For automatically changing exposure. When the shutter release button ispressed, three images are captured. The first one has no compensation,
the second is underexposed and the third is overexposed. This camerafeatures Exposure Bracketing that captures images in different exposures,and Extended Bracketing that captures images with set White Balance,
Saturation, Hue, High/Low Key Adjustment, Contrast and Sharpness
levels.
Bright portions
Overexposed area in the image loses contrast and appears white.

10
Appendix

Camera Shake (Blur)
When the camera moves while the shutter is open, the entire image
appears blurred. This occurs more often when shutter speed is low.
Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, andraising the shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod to stabilize thecamera. As camera shake is mostly likely to occur when pressing the
shutter release button, use the Shake Reduction function, the self-timer or
the remote control unit to prevent camera movement.
CMOS Sensor
Photography element which converts the light entering through the lens
into electric signals that create the image.

Color SpaceA defined range of colors from the spectrum which are used. In digital
cameras, [sRGB] is defined as the standard by Exif. In this camera,[AdobeRGB] is also used because of the richer color expression over
sRGB.

315

Color TemperatureThis numerically expresses the color of the light source illuminating the
subject. This is indicated in absolute temperature, using Kelvin (K) units.
The color of light shifts to a bluish color as the color temperature rises, andto a reddish color as the color temperature falls.
Dark portions
Underexposed area in the image loses contrast and appears black.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
A digital camera file system standard established by the Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Depth of Field
Area of focus. This depends on the aperture, lens focal length, anddistance to the subject. For example, select a smaller aperture (higher
number) to increase the depth of field or use a larger aperture (smaller
number) to decrease the depth of field.
DNG RAW file
DNG (Digital Negative) is a general-purpose RAW file format designed by
Adobe Systems. When images captured in proprietary RAW formats areconverted to DNG format, support and compatibility for the images
increases significantly.

Dynamic Range (D-Range)
Indicated with a value expressing the light level reproducible in an image.
This is the same as the term “latitude” used with silver halide film.
Generally, when the dynamic range is wide, it is difficult for bright and darkareas to occur in the image, and when the dynamic range is narrow, ahigher contrast image can be achieved.

10
Appendix

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
Rules for writing information onto a card with recorded images regarding
the specific images and number of copies to be printed. Prints can easily
be made by taking images to a DPOF photo printing store.

316

EV (Exposure Value)
Exposure value is determined by the combination of the aperture value
and the shutter speed.
EV Compensation
Process of adjusting the image brightness by changing the shutter speed
and/or aperture value.
Exif (Exchangeable image file format for digital still camera)
A standard digital camera file format established by the Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Exif-JPEG format
Exif stands for Exchangeable Image File Format. This image file format isbased on the JPEG image data format, and allows thumbnail images andimage properties to be embedded into the data. Software that does notsupport this format processes the image as a regular JPEG image.
Exif-TIFF format
Exif stands for Exchangeable Image File Format. This image file format isbased on the TIFF image data format, and allows thumbnail images andimage properties to be embedded into the data. Software that does notsupport this format processes the image as a regular TIFF image.
Focus point
Position in the viewfinder that determines focus. In this camera, selectfrom Auto, Select and Center.

10

HistogramA graph that shows the darkest and brightest points in an image. The
horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents
the number of pixels. This is useful when you wish to refer to the exposure
status of an image.

Appendix

JPEG
An image compression format. Although the image quality deteriorates alittle, images can be compressed to a smaller file size than with TIFF andother formats. In this camera, select from Z (Premium), C (Best),
D (Better), or E (Good). Images recorded in JPEG format are suited forviewing on your PC or for attaching to e-mail.

Metering Method
Brightness of subject is measured to determine exposure. In this camera,
select from Multi-segment Metering, Center-weighted Metering and Spot
Metering.

317

Mired
Proportional scale of measurement that consistently shows color change
per unit. Determined by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by
1,000,000.
ND (Neutral Density) Filter
A filter with many saturation levels that adjusts the brightness without
affecting the color tone of pictures.
Noise Reduction
Process to reduce noise (image roughness or unevenness) caused byslow shutter speed or high sensitivity shooting.
NTSC/PAL
These are video output formats. NTSC is mainly used in Japan, North
America, and South Korea. PAL is mainly used in Europe and in China.
PNG format
Images saved using this format can be compressed to a small file size, but
the reversible compression of this format makes the file size larger than
JPEG. This format is for use with full-color images and prevents quality
loss even when re-edited. PNG files, however, cannot be viewed on older
browsers (Internet Explorer 3.0 or earlier or Internet Explorer 4.5 on
Macintosh). In addition, thumbnail images and image properties cannot beembedded in the data.
10
Appendix

Quality Level
This refers to the image compression ratio. The lower the compression,
the more detailed the image. The image becomes rougher as thecompression rate rises.

318

RAW data
Unedited image data output from the CMOS sensor. RAW data is data
before being internally processed by the camera. Camera settings at thetime of capture, such as White Balance, Contrast, Saturation, andSharpness can be set for each frame after shooting. In addition, RAW dataare 12 bit data that contain 16 times the information of 8 bit JPEG data.
Rich gradations are possible. Transfer RAW data to your computer anduse the provided software to create image data with different settings,
such as JPEG or TIFF.
Recorded Pixels
Indicates the size of the image by the number of pixels. The more pixels
that compose a picture, the larger the image size.
Sensitivity
The level of sensitivity to light. With a high sensitivity, images can be shotwith a high shutter speed even in dark places, reducing camera shake.
However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to noise.
Shutter Speed
The length of time that the shutter is open and light strikes the CMOS
sensor. The amount of light that strikes the CMOS sensor can be changedby altering the shutter speed.
sRGB (standard RGB)
International standard of color space established by the IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space forcomputer monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif.

10

Vignetting
The picture edges are blackened when part of the light coming from thesubject is blocked by the hood or filter ring, or when the flash is partially
blocked by the lens.

Appendix

White Balance
While shooting, color temperature is adjusted to match the light source sothat the subject appears to have correct color.

IndexSymbols| (Green) button .............19, 21| (Preview) button ..............129[A Custom Setting] Menu.......................................85, 288
B (Green) mode ...................95
Q (Playback) button...................................19, 21, 78[Q Playback] Menu ....213, 287[A Rec. Mode] Menu .....83, 284
i (Delete) button .............21, 79[R Set-up] Menu ..........254, 287
E (Flash pop-up) button.........................................18, 74m (EV Compensation) button.................................18, 21, 115

A

Auto Power Off ..................... 270
F (White Balance) ......... 191
Autofocus = ...................... 118
Automatic Sensitivity Correction............................................... 90c (Aperture Priority) mode............................................. 102
AV cable ............................... 233
AV Equipment ...................... 233

B
p (Bulb) Mode ..................... 110
Base Parameter Adj (Digital
Filter) .................................... 242
Battery .................................... 43
Beep ..................................... 257
Bright Portion ............... 199, 314
Brightness Adjustment ......... 199
Brightness Level .................. 264
Brightness level .................... 264
Built-in Flash .......................... 72
Bulb Mode p ........................ 110

C
Cable Switch ................ 111, 303
Calendar display .................. 218
Camera Shake ..................... 314
Capture Information ............... 23
Card access lamp .................. 17
Catch-in Focus ..................... 128
Center-weighted ................... 114
City ....................................... 260
Cloudy (White Balance) ....... 191
CMOS Sensor ...................... 314
CMOS sensor plane indicator............................................... 17
Color (Digital Filter) .............. 241
Color of the monitor ............. 265

10
Appendix

AC Adapter .............................47
Accessories ..........................299
Adding the Date ...................274
AdobeRGB ...................279, 314
AE Lock ........................116, 126
AE Metering .................113, 317
L button ..........................19
AF Adjustment ......................121
AF Assist Light .................17, 67= (Autofocus) ....................118= button ......................19, 120
AF point switching dial ...19, 122
AF160FC ......................173, 300
AF200FG ......................173, 300
AF360FGZ ...................173, 300
AF540FGZ ...................173, 300
Aperture .........................88, 314
Aperture Priority Mode c ....102
Auto Bracket .................148, 314

319

320

Color Space .................279, 315
Color Temperature.............................196, 197, 315
Composition Adjustment ......203
Continuous Shooting ............143
Contrast (Custom Image) .....205
Contrast AF ..........................157
Contrast-Control-Sync (Flash).............................................182
Control panel ....................24, 35
Copyright Holder ..................277
Correct exposure ....................88
Cropping ...............................239
f (White Balance) ...........191
Custom Filter (Digital Filters).....................................154, 242
Custom Image ......................205[A Custom Setting] Menu.......................................85, 288

D

10
Appendix

Dark Portion .................199, 315
Date Adjustment .....................61
Date change .........................258
Daylight (White Balance) ......191
Daylight-Sync shooting ..........76
DCF ......................................315
Default Setting ......................284
Delete .............................79, 227
Delete All Images .................230i (Delete) button .............21, 79
Delete Folder ........................228
Deleting a Single Image .........79
Depth of field ..................89, 315
Destination ...........................258
Digital Filter ..................153, 241
Digital Preview .....................131
Diopter Adjust .........................55
Direct keys ...............34, 82, 284
Display Language ................261
Distortion ..............................201

DNG ..................................... 315
DPOF ................................... 315
DPOF Settings ..................... 273
D-Range ....................... 199, 315
Drive Mode ............................. 82
Dust Alert ............................. 296
Dust Removal ...................... 295
Dynamic Range ..... 92, 199, 315

EElectronic Level .............. 65, 266
Error Message ..................... 305
EV ........................................ 316
EV Compensation ........ 115, 316
m (EV Compensation) button................................. 18, 21, 115
EV Steps .............................. 116
Exif ............................... 277, 316
Exposure ................................ 88
Exposure Bracketing ............ 148
Exposure Mode ................ 39, 93
Exposure Warning............................. 101, 103, 109
Extended Bracketing ............ 151
External flash ....................... 173
Extract Color (Digital Filter)..................................... 153, 241
Eyecup ................................... 55

F
Face Detection ..................... 157
File Format ........................... 188
File Name ............................. 268
File number .......................... 267
Film plane indicator ................ 17
Filter ............................. 153, 241
Filter Effect (Custom Image)............................................. 205
Fish-eye (Digital Filter)..................................... 153, 241
Fix Focus ............................. 124

Flash ..............................72, 167
Flash (White Balance) ..........191
Flash compensation ...............76
Flash Exposure Compensation...............................................76
E (Flash pop-up) button.........................................18, 72
Flash X-sync Speed ModeM.............................................112
Fluorescent Light (White
Balance) ...............................191
Focal Length ........................135
Focus Indicator .....................126
Focus Lock ...........................124
Focus Mode .........................118
Focus mode lever ...........19, 118
Focus point ...................122, 316
Focusing ...............................118
Folder display .......................217
Folder Name ........................267
Format ..................................256
Four-way controller (2345).........................................20, 21
Front e-dial .......................18, 21

GGreen button ....................19, 21
Green mode B ......................95
Guide display .................22, 262

H

321

I
Image Comparison ............... 226
Image Tone .......................... 205
Index .................................... 219
M button .............. 19, 21, 78
Initial settings ......................... 57
Initialize ................................ 256
Input Focal Length ............... 135
Instant Review ............... 68, 263
Interval Shooting .................. 144
o button ........................ 18, 90
ISO Sensitivity ................ 90, 318

J
JPEG .................................... 316
JPEG Quality ................. 51, 187
JPEG Recorded Pixels ........ 186

K
Kelvin ................................... 196

L
Language Setting ........... 57, 261
Lateral chromatic aberration 201
LCD Color Tuning ................ 265
LCD panel .............................. 33
Lens ............................... 53, 292
Lens Correction .................... 201
Lens unlock button ........... 18, 54
Live View .............................. 156
Lock Exposure ..................... 126
U button ....................... 19, 158

10Appendix

HDMI terminal ......................235
HDR (Digital Filter) ...............242
HDR Capture ........................200
High Contrast (Digital Filter).....................................153, 241
High Dynamic Range ...........200
High/Low Key Adjustment(Custom Image) ...................205
High-ISO Noise Reduction .....92
Highlight Correction ..............199

High-Speed Flash Sync Mode............................................. 175
Histogram ....................... 28, 316
Hometown ...................... 58, 258
Horizon Correction ............... 133
Hue (Custom Image) ............ 205
Hyper-manual Mode a ........ 107
Hyper-program Mode e ........ 96

322

10
AppendixMPa (Hyper-manual) Mode ......107
Main switch ................18, 21, 56
Manual focus \ .................126
Manual Mode a ...................107
Manual White Balance .........194
Mass Storage Class .............276
Matte Field ...........................127
Memory ................................281
Memory Card .........................49
3 button .............20, 21, 36
Menu Operation .....................36
Meter Operating Time ..........114
Metering mode switching lever.......................................19, 113\ (Manual focus) ..............126
Microphone ..........................162
Miniature (Digital Filter) ........242
Mired ............................196, 317
Mirror Lock-up ..............141, 298
Mode dial ..........................19, 39
Mode dial lock button .............19
Monitor ...................................22
Monochrome (Digital Filter) ..241
Movie ............................160, 163
MSC .....................................276
Multi-exposure ......................146
Multi-image display ..............216
Multiple Flashes ...................181
Multi-segment .......................113e (Hyper-program) Mode ...... 96
PAL .............................. 234, 317
Pastel (Digital Filter) ............. 242
PC/AV terminal .................... 233
Phase Difference ................. 157
Photographer Information .... 277
Picture Transfer Protocol ..... 276
Pixel Mapping ...................... 280
Playback .......................... 25, 78
Q (Playback) button................................... 19, 21, 78
Playback Display Method ..... 215[Q Playback] Menu .... 213, 287
Playback Mode Palette..................................... 212, 286
Playback time ......................... 46
Playing Back Movies ............ 165
PNG ..................................... 317
Power ..................................... 56
Press fully .............................. 69
Press halfway ......................... 69
Preview ................................ 129
Program Line ......................... 94
Program Mode e ................... 96
Protect .................................. 231
PTP ...................................... 276
P-TTL (Flash) ....................... 179
P-TTL Auto (Flash) .............. 174

N

Quality Level .. 51, 161, 187, 317
Quick Zoom .......................... 215

ND (Neutral Density) Filter ...317
Noise Reduction .............92, 317
NTSC ...........................234, 317O
4 button ........................19, 21
Operation Guide .....................30
Optical Preview ....................130
Optional Accessories ...........299

Q

R
RAW ............................. 188, 318| button .................... 19, 189
RAW Development .............. 247
RAW file format .................... 189
Rear e-dial ....................... 19, 21[A Rec. Mode] Menu .... 83, 284

JPEG Recorded Pixels ...........51
Recorded Pixels...............................51, 186, 318
Red-eye reduction ..........75, 179
Remaining image storage
capacity ..................................46
Remote Control ............138, 303
Reset ....................................290
Resize ..................................238
Retro (Digital Filter) ......153, 241
Rotate ...................................225

Spot Metering ....................... 114
sRGB ........................... 279, 318
Star Burst (Digital Filter)..................................... 153, 241
Status display ....................... 262
Status screen ......................... 23
Strap ...................................... 42
Superimpose AF Area .... 32, 122
K (Sensitivity Priority) Mode............................................... 98

S

L (Shutter & Aperture Priority)
Mode .................................... 104
Text Size ........................ 58, 262
Toning (Custom Image) ....... 205
Toy Camera (Digital Filter)..................................... 153, 241
Trailing Curtain Sync .... 170, 180
Tungsten Light (White Balance)............................................. 191
TV ........................................ 233
b (Shutter Priority) mode ... 100

TU
USB Connection .................. 275
USER ................................... 207
Using Aperture Ring ............. 294

VVideo jack ............................ 233
Video Output Format ............ 234
Video terminal ...................... 233
Viewfinder ........................ 31, 55
Vignetting ....................... 72, 318

W
Water Color (Digital Filter) ... 242
White Balance .............. 191, 318
Wireless Mode (Flash) ......... 176
World Time ........................... 258

10
Appendix

Saturation (Custom Image) ..205
Save as Manual WB .............198
Save Settings .......................207
SD Memory Card ...................49
Select Battery .......................270
Select&Delete ......................227
Self-timer ..............................136
Sensitivity ...............................90
Sensitivity Priority Mode K...............................................98
Sensor Cleaning ...........295, 297[R Set-up] Menu ..........254, 287
Shade (White Balance) ........191
Shadow Correction ...............199
Shake Reduction ..........132, 162
Sharpness (Custom Image).............................................205
Shutter & Aperture Priority Mode
L ......................................104
Shutter Priority Mode b ......100
Shutter release button 18, 21, 69
Shutter Speed ................88, 318
Slideshow .............................222
Slim (Digital Filter) ................242
Slow Shutter Speed NR .........92
Slow-speed Sync .................168
Soft (Digital Filter) ........153, 241
Sound ...................................161

323

324

X
M (Flash X-sync Speed) mode.............................................112
X-sync socket .......................183

Z
Zoom Display .......................214
Zoom Lens .............................71

10
Appendix

Memo

325

326

WARRANTY POLICYAll PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide
photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects ofmaterial or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date ofpurchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced
without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does notshow evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering,battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions,or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The manufacturer or its
authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations
except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable fordamages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential
damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material orworkmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability ofthe manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties,
whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts
as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by nonauthorized PENTAX service facilities.

10
Appendix

Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period
should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment
or to the manufacturer. If there are no representatives of the manufacturer
in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage
prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before theequipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs
procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will
be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be
returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is notcovered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its
representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner.
If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish tohave it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing
fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in thatcountry. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer
will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty
policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance
fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase whenrequired, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of yourequipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing,please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized
representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it
directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service
charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct theservice station to proceed with the servicing.

327• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory
rights.
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors insome countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we
recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with yourproduct at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor
in your country for more information and to receive a copy of thewarranty policy.

10
Appendix

The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European
Union.

328

For customers in USA
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmfulinterference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee thatinterference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For customers in CanadaThis Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

10
Appendix

Pour les utilisateurs au Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply.
The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material,
which may require special handling.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorateDeclaration of Conformity
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 forClass B Personal Computers and Peripherals
We:

PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.

Located at:

600 12 th Street, Suite 300
Golden, Colorado 80401 U.S.A.
Phone: 303-799-8000 FAX: 303-790-1131

Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified hereincomplies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital
device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested
and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained
continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to bewithin the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on thestatistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above
named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies withthe standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.

Product Name:PENTAX Digital Still Camera

Model Number: Q
Contact person: Customer Service Manager
Date and Place: May, 2009, Colorado

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old
Equipment and Used Batteries
1. In the European Union
These symbols on the products, packaging and/or
accompanying documents mean that used electrical andelectronic equipments and batteries should not be mixed withgeneral household waste.
Used electrical/electronic equipments and batteries must betreated separately and in accordance with legislation that
requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of theseproducts.
Following the implementation by member states, privatehouseholds within the EU states may return their usedelectrical/electronic equipments and batteries to designatedcollection facilities free of charge*.
In some countries your local retailer may also take back yourold product free of charge if you purchase a similar new one.
*Please contact your local authority for further details.
By disposing of this product correctly you will help ensure thatthe waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery andrecycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on theenvironment and human health which could otherwise arise
due to inappropriate waste handling.
2. In other countries outside the EU
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you
wish to discard these items, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be
returned free of charge to the dealer, even when you don'tpurchase a new product. Further collection facilities are listedon the home page of www.swico.ch or www.sens.ch.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):This symbol might be used in combination with a designation
for the chemical element or compound in use. In this case you
have to comply with the requirement set by the Directive for thechemicals involved.

Memo

Memo

Memo

HOYA CORPORATIONPENTAX Imaging Systems Division
2-36-9, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN(http://www.pentax.jp)
Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg, GERMANY
PENTAX Europe GmbH(European Headquarters) (HQ - http://www.pentaxeurope.com)(Germany - http://www.pentax.de)
PENTAX U.K. Limited

PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough, Berks
SL3 8PN, U.K.
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)

PENTAX France S.A.S.

112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,
FRANCE(http://www.pentax.fr)

PENTAX (Schweiz) AG

Widenholzstrasse 1, 8304 Wallisellen, Postfach 367,
8305 Dietlikon, SWITZERLAND(http://www.pentax.ch)

PENTAX Canada Inc.

1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,
CANADA (http://www.pentax.ca)

PENTAX Trading(SHANGHAI) Limited

23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032 CHINA(http://www.pentax.com.cn)

Operating Manual

Operating Manual

PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
(Headquarters)
600 12th Street, Suite 300 Golden, Colorado 80401, U.S.A.
(PENTAX Service Department)
12061 Tejon St. STE 600 Westminster, Colorado 80234,
U.S.A. (http://www.pentaximaging.com)

SLR Digital Camera

http://www.pentax.jp/english• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.
53495

Copyright © HOYA CORPORATION 2009
H03-200907 Printed in Philippines

For optimum camera performance, please read the
Operating Manual before using the camera.